JP6813535B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to a specific state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a game machine, when it is controlled to a specific state which is advantageous for the player such as a big hit, if there is a hold storage information that pre-reads the hold storage information and becomes a specific state, a special effect is executed. There was something to do (Patent Document 1).

Further, as such a game machine, the first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time, and the variable display of the second variable display means is advantageous for a player such as a small hit. There was one that was controlled to a gaming state in which a specific state was likely to occur (Patent Document 2). Furthermore, based on the variable display result of the special identification information, two special variable devices (first prize opening and second prize) that can change from the non-easy state to the easy state in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state. By providing a mouth) and alternately opening and closing these special variable devices in the gaming state, there was an attempt to shorten the period of being controlled to an advantageous state while suppressing the game medium that does not enter the special variable device (patented). Document 3).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-004890 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-005513 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-90818

In such a conventional gaming machine, when controlled to the specific state of Patent Document 2, the hold storage information of the second variable display means is pre-read as in Patent Document 1, and the hold is set to the specific state. If there is stored information, it is conceivable to perform a special effect.

However, in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned Patent Document 3, there is a problem that the gambling property is increased by shortening the period of the advantageous state.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing an increase in gambling .

(A) A gaming machine capable of variable display of ordinary identification information and variable display of special identification information.
An ordinary variable means provided in a game area where the game medium can flow down and capable of changing from a non-predetermined state to a predetermined state in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-predetermined state based on the variable display result of the ordinary identification information.
A special variable means provided in the game area and capable of changing from a non-easy state to an easy state in which a game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state based on the display result of the variable display.
A game control means capable of controlling a special state in which the ordinary variable means changes to the predetermined state more frequently than a non-special state and an advantageous state in which the special variable means changes to the easy state.
Equipped with a production control means that can control the production ,
The game control means controls the non-special state when controlling to the advantageous state.
On the upstream side of the special variable means in the game area, a first special area in which the normal identification information can be variably displayed by passing the game medium and the passed game medium is discharged out of the game area, and a game A second special area is provided in which the variable display of the normal identification information becomes feasible by the passage of the medium and the passed game medium is not discharged to the outside of the game area.
The first special area is provided at a position closer to the special variable means than the second special area in the specific game area where the game medium passing through the specific path of the passage of the game medium can flow down.
The effect control means launches the game medium toward a predetermined game area different from the specific game area based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first special area when it is not in the advantageous state and the special state. It is possible to carry out a promotion effect that encourages things
In the predetermined game area, neither the special start area in which the variable display of the special identification information can be executed, the variable display of the special identification information or the variable display of the ordinary identification information can be executed, and the predetermined game value is given. A predetermined area to be formed and an area provided with,
It is characterized by that.
(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) that can perform variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative symbols, background symbols, etc.) and control it to a specific state (small hit game state, big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. 1st prize)
The first variable display means (first special symbol display 8a, etc.) that performs the first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, etc.) and derives and displays the display result, and
A second variable display means (second special symbol display 8b, etc.) that performs a second variable display (variable display of the second special symbol, etc.) and derives and displays the display result, and
A first hold storage means (RAM 55, a first hold storage buffer in FIG. 20, etc.) that stores information related to the first variable display that has not yet been started as first hold storage information, and
A second hold storage means (RAM 55, a second hold storage buffer in FIG. 20, etc.) that stores information related to the second variable display that has not yet been started as second hold storage information.
It is provided with a look-ahead determination means (microcomputer 200 for effect control, step 155FS520 of FIG. 36, etc.) for determining whether or not the second variable display that has not been started is controlled to the specific state.
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (S26A, S26B, etc. in FIG. 8).
When the specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, the variable display is interrupted and then interrupted after the end of the specific state. The interrupting means (game control microcomputer 560, steps 155FS314 to 155FS316, etc. in FIG. 18) that enables the first variable display to be restarted, and
Based on the fact that when the specific state is controlled based on the second variable display, it is determined that the second variable display, which has not yet been started by the look-ahead determination means, is controlled to the specific state. , A special effect executing means (microcomputer 200 for effect control, step 155FS534 in FIG. 36, etc.) capable of executing a special effect (holding continuous notification effect) (FIG. 34 (c), etc.).
When the specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display (Y or the like in step 155FS521 of FIG. 36), the execution of the special effect is restricted in the specific state (FIG. It is provided with special effect limiting means (microcomputer 200 for effect control, step 155FS521 in FIG. 36, etc.).
further,
A game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided in a game area (for example, right game area 96SG002R) where it can flow down, and a non-predetermined state (for example, a closed state) is provided based on a variable display result of normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol). ) To a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-predetermined state (for example, a variable winning ball device 96SG006B).
A special case provided in the game area and capable of changing from a non-easy state (for example, a closed state) to an easy state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state based on the display result of the variable display. A variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 96SG007) and
A special state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state) in which the normal variable device changes to the predetermined state more frequently than the non-special state, and an advantage that the special variable device changes to the easy state. A game control means that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot game state) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 51).
With
The game control means is set to the non-special state when it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the time saving control is not executed even during the big hit game of any big hit type).
At the upstream position of the special variable device in the game area, a special area is provided in which the variable display of the ordinary identification information can be executed by the entry of the game medium and the entered game medium is discharged to the outside of the game area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 54-1, in the right game area 96SG002R, a portion where the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is provided at an upstream position of the special variable winning ball device 96SG007).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of an unintended advantageous state for the player based on the first variable display even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed. , It is possible to improve the fun of the special production. In addition, the increase in gambling can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above.
The specific state controlled based on the first variable display includes a first specific state (probability variation big hit in the case of a big hit, etc.) and a second specific state (big hit) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific state. In the case of a normal jackpot, etc.), including (Fig. 11 etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the execution of the special effect for the second variable display is restricted, the specific state based on the first variable display is controlled even though the special effect for the second variable display is executed. In addition, when the second specific state, which is disadvantageous to the player among the specific states, is reached, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being significantly reduced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The specific state is less than the first value grantable state (big hit game state, etc.) in which the first game value (opening of the variable winning ball device 20, etc.) can be given to the player, and the first value grantable state. Including the second value-grantable state (small hit game state, etc.) in which the second game value (opening of the special variable winning ball device 22, etc.) can be given to the player.
When the special effect executing means is controlled to the specific state based on the second variable display, the second value can be added to the second variable display that has not yet been started by the look-ahead determination means. Based on the determination that the specific state is controlled, the special effect can be executed (when there is a hold memory that becomes a small hit in the second hold memory in the small hit game state, there is a small hit hold. (Steps 155FS520 to 155FS523, 155FS532, 155FS534, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the special production.
(4) In the gaming machine according to (3) above.
As the special effect, the special effect executing means notifies the effect of notifying the game value acquired by the player in the second value-applicable state, and notifies the game value acquired by the player in the first value-applicable state. It is executed in an effect mode (“GET” display in FIG. 34 (c), etc.) different from the effect (“1600 GET” display in FIGS. 34 (d) to (g)).

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the special production.
(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
When the special effect limiting means is controlled to the specific state based on the second variable display, if the first hold storage information is stored in the first hold storage means, the specific state is stored. (Step 155FS522 in FIG. 36, etc.) limits the execution of the special effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to further reduce the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player based on the first variable display, which is not intended in the effect, even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed. Can be done.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The special effect executing means can be executed when the specific state is controlled based on the second variable display in a predetermined state (KT state or the like) (hold continuous notification effect setting process and small hit in FIG. 36). The payout acquisition effect process is executed when the small hit game state is controlled),
In the predetermined state, the variable display time when the specific state is not controlled based on the first variable display is when the variable display time is not controlled to the specific state based on the first variable display in a state other than the predetermined state. The variation time (2 seconds) when the first special symbol at the time of KT in FIG. 12 (B) is shorter than the shortest time among the variable display times is the first special symbol at the time of non-KT in FIG. 12 (A). It is shorter than the shortest time (15 seconds) of the fluctuation time at the time of deviation).

According to such a configuration, the first variable display can be digested earlier, and the execution of the special effect for the second variable display can be less likely to be restricted.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The special effect executing means can be executed when it is controlled to the specific state based on the second variable display in a predetermined state (KT state or the like) (155FS534 or the like in FIG. 36).
In the predetermined state, the variable display time when controlled to the specific state based on the first variable display is longer than the variable display time when controlled to the specific state based on the second variable display. (The fluctuation time (5 minutes) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown in FIG. 12B is longer than the fluctuation time at the time of the second special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown in FIGS. 13 and 14. ..

According to such a configuration, the variable display time when controlled to a specific state based on the first variable display is longer than the variable display time when controlled to a specific state based on the second variable display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific state based on the first variable display from being controlled before the specific state based on the second variable display even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed. ..

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following (8) to (13). Conventionally, in a game machine, from a non-easy state to an easy state in which a game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state based on a variable display result of special identification information as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-90818. It is equipped with two changeable special variable devices (1st big winning opening and 2nd big winning opening), and by opening and closing these special variable devices alternately in the game state, it is advantageous while suppressing the game medium that does not enter the special variable device. Some were trying to shorten the period controlled by the state. However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the gambling property is increased by shortening the period of the advantageous state. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of suppressing an increase in gambling.

(8) In order to achieve the above objectives, a game machine according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of executing variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbol) and variable display of special identification information (for example, special symbol).
A game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided in a game area (for example, right game area 96SG002R) where it can flow down, and from a non-predetermined state (for example, a closed state) to a non-predetermined state based on a variable display result of ordinary identification information. Also, a normal variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 96SG006B) that can be changed to a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter, and
It is provided in the game area and can be changed from a non-easy state (for example, a closed state) to an easy state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state based on the variable display result of the special identification information. With a special variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 96SG007),
A special state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state) in which the frequency at which the ordinary variable device changes to the predetermined state is higher than that of the non-special state, and an advantage that the special variable device changes to the easy state. A game control means that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot game state) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 51).
With
The game control means is set to the non-special state when it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the time saving control is not executed even during the big hit game of any big hit type).
At the upstream position of the special variable device in the game area, a special area is provided which enables variable display of ordinary identification information by entering the game medium and discharges the entered game medium out of the game area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 54-1, in the right game area 96SG002R, a portion where the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is provided at an upstream position of the special variable winning ball device 96SG007).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the increase in gambling can be suppressed.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (8) above.
At the upstream position of the special area in the game area, a specific area is provided in which the variable display of the normal identification information can be executed by the entry of the game medium and the entered game medium is not discharged to the outside of the game area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 54-1, in the right game area 96SG002R, a portion where a passage gate 96SG041 is provided at an upstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the chances that the variable display of the ordinary identification information is executed while suppressing the increase in gambling, so that the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(10) In the gaming machine according to (9) above,
The ordinary variable device is provided on the downstream side of the specific region and at an upstream position of the special region (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-1, in the right gaming region 96SG002R, the passage gate 96SG041. The part where the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is provided at the downstream position of the above and at the upstream position of the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the game medium can enter the normal variable device before entering the special area, it is possible to improve the entry efficiency of the game medium into the normal variable device in the special state.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (10) above.
The ordinary variable device and the special area are provided in a specific game area (for example, right game area 96SG002R) in the game area.
In a predetermined game area (for example, left game area 96SG002L) other than the specific game area in the game area, a special start area (for example, a first start winning opening) in which variable display of special identification information can be executed and a special It is characterized in that a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 9010) is provided in which neither the variable display of the identification information nor the variable display of the ordinary identification information can be executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the normal identification information from being unreasonably variablely displayed by the game medium flowing down the predetermined game area.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (11) above.
The game area is provided with a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 9010) in which neither the variable display of the special identification information nor the variable display of the normal identification information can be executed.
The magnitude of the game value given when the game medium enters the special area is smaller than the magnitude of the game value given when the game medium enters the predetermined area (for example, in FIG. 54-4). As shown, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins the general winning opening 96SG042 is 2 balls, and the number of winning balls when the game ball wins the general winning opening 9010 is 5 balls)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prolong the period of the advantageous state while suppressing the influence of the game value given in response to the entry of the game medium into the special area in the advantageous state, so that the increase in gambling is further increased. It can be suppressed.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (12) above.
Around the special area, a specific member (for example, a plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 shown in FIG. 54-1) for changing the rate of entry of the game medium into the special area is provided. It is said.
According to this feature, the duration of favorable conditions can be adjusted.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific items described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific items together with the invention-specific items described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided with the following means.
(Means 1) The game machine according to the present invention is a game machine capable of playing a game, and is counted based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening or a special winning opening 24). The counting display executing means is provided with a counting display executing means (for example, a portion for executing step S707 (a modification S707) in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of updating and displaying the display (for example, the prize ball number display). According to the first pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is displayed is the first period, and the second pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is displayed is the second period longer than the first period. The count display can be updated and displayed (for example, when the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second). When the prize ball number display 305 is displayed in the second KT pattern, it is characterized in that the prize ball number is incremented by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

(Means 2) In the means 1, a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of controlling a plurality of states including at least a first state (for example, a jackpot game state) and a second state (for example, a second KT state). A portion for executing steps S305 to S307, S355 to S357, S2208A, and S2210B in 560) is provided, and the counting display executing means can update and display the counting display by the first pattern when controlled to the first state. When controlled to the second state, the count display can be updated and displayed by the second pattern (for example, in the big hit game state, the number of prize balls is displayed in the prize ball number display 300 displayed by the big hit pattern. In the second KT state, the number of prize balls displayed by the second KT pattern may be increased by one, and the number of prize balls may be increased by one in the prize ball number display 305.) According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

(Means 3) In the means 2, the state control means can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S358 to S360). As the first state, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 has steps S305 to S307 and S355). ~ S357 execution part), as the second state, based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot), the special state (for example, the first state) compared to before the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured so that it can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to (2KT state) is increased (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is a portion that executes steps S2208A and S2210B). According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

(Means 4) When the means 3 is controlled to a special state, the winning frequency of the game medium is lower than when the game medium is controlled to a specific state (for example, in the big hit game state, the game ball per round. In the second KT state, about 1 to 3 game balls can be won in one small hit game), and the counting display execution means is special. When the state is controlled, the count display is updated and displayed at a slower update speed than when the state is controlled (for example, the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern in the jackpot game state). In this case, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the number of prize balls display 305 is displayed in the second KT pattern in the second KT state. It may be configured to increase the number of prize balls by 1 at two speeds (for example, 0.5 seconds)). According to such a configuration, since the winning frequency of the game medium is low when controlled in a special state, it is possible to create a continuous feeling of the counting display by slowing down the updating speed of the updating display of the counting display. it can.

(Means 5) In the means 3 or the means 4, the counting display executing means can continuously execute the update display of the counting display when it is controlled to the special state and then controlled to the special state again (for example,). As shown in FIG. 45, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, all the prize balls are displayed in the third prize ball increase effect. If the update of is not completed, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the fluctuation display after the end of the small hit game and the next small hit game can be continuously executed to increase the third prize ball. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a continuous feeling of the count display by making it possible to continuously execute the update display of the count display.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 3 to the means 5, an approach advantageous state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult (for example, an open state). For example, a variable starting device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed to a closed state, and a special variable device (for example, a special variable device that is provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and can be changed into an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state). For example, in the special variable winning ball device 22) and the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, steps S350 to S354 are performed. By executing the variable winning ball device 15, the second starting winning opening 14 has a portion that executes a variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball), and the state control means is variable. Based on the fact that the display result of the display is a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol), it is possible to control the special variable device to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that changes the approach advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). , The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to execute steps S358 to S360). According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

(Means 7) The means 6 is provided with a specific variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 20) that can change between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state, and the state control means displays a variable display result as a specific display result. Based on (for example, a jackpot symbol), it is possible to control the specific variable device to a specific state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that changes the specific variable device to an approach advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is a step. (S305 to S307, S355 to S357 are executed), the counting display executing means displays the counting display based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific variable device and the game medium has entered the special variable device as a predetermined opportunity. The update display is possible, and the count display is updated and displayed at different update speeds when the game medium enters the specific variable device and when the game medium enters the special variable device (for example, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot pattern is used. When displaying the prize ball number display 300, a display is performed in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) based on the occurrence of a prize in the large winning opening. When the prize ball number display 305 is displayed in the second KT pattern in the 2KT state, the prize ball number is set to 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) based on the winning of the special winning opening 24. It may be configured to perform a display that increases in increments). According to such a configuration, the mode of the update display of the count display is changed depending on which variable device the game medium has entered, thereby improving the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed. be able to.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to the means 7, the counting display executing means is updated differently depending on whether the counting display is updated and displayed according to the first pattern and the counting display is updated and displayed according to the second pattern. The count display is updated and displayed according to the speed (for example, when the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second), and the display is performed. When the prize ball number display 305 is displayed in the 2KT pattern, it may be configured to increase the prize ball number by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). According to such a configuration, by making the update speed of the update display of the count display different according to the pattern of updating the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed. ..

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is an effect drawing which shows the effect executed by the effect display device in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous notification effect setting process and the small hit payout acquisition effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the hold continuous notification effect setting process and the small hit payout acquisition effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which shows the number of prize balls in each winning opening and the corresponding prize ball number notification command. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a special figure display result determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a general figure display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the left-handed notification effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary figure start mouth winning production processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball number display processing. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which simplified the main board. (A) is an explanatory diagram of performance information that can be displayed on a display monitor, (B) is an explanatory diagram of values aggregated for performance display, and (C) is a display on each display unit of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing of. This is a timing chart when the jackpot game state is controlled to the normal state. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor when an error occurs. It is a figure which shows the switching mode of a display monitor.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as the second variable display unit 9b), and a display area (hereinafter, the background symbol display unit) in which the player can easily visually recognize the displayed contents as compared with the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. 9c).

The variable display is also called a variable display or a variable, and is executed as a display that operates a symbol as various identification information such as a first special symbol, a second special symbol, a background symbol, and a normal symbol in addition to the above-mentioned probability variation symbol. To. The variable display mode includes a display mode with various variable patterns such as a scroll display and an in-situ switching display.

Note that it is easy to visually recognize the displayed contents, for example, while the size of the display area is large and the displayed contents in the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol display unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol display unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol display unit 9c has two variable displays. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed on the display unit is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. ) Is difficult to grasp. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for displaying the symbol variation for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b use more types of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probable variable symbol. It may be configured to be variable display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Also, some may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is 0 to 5 numbers and non-numeric characters and the first special symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of. The variable display by the first special symbol display 8a and the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as the first variable display. The variable display by the second special symbol display 8b and the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second variable display.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, an indicator of another aspect may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages, is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 1. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 13 when the number of first reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 1, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning in which the second starting condition is not satisfied. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 0, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 1, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 5, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 17 is detected by the actuating gate switch 17a.

Below the operating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In an advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also referred to as the open state) in which the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display 10. The opening control is executed so that the second starting winning opening 14 which is the winning area is opened.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is formed. The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 22. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 7 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 22 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is used for special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

Inside the special winning opening 24, a switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 are used. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the special winning opening 24 cannot pass (enter) the game ball to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 14, a second starting opening switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the game ball in which the first start winning opening 13 is driven to the left side of the game area 7 is easier to enter than the game ball driven to the right side in the game area 7. Since the game nail is set as described above, the player aims at the left side of the game area 7 and launches the ball (so-called left-handed operation) in the normal game state except during the big hit game and the KT state described later. )I do. On the other hand, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special winning opening 24) are playing games. Since it is provided on the right side of the area 7, the player performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area 7 during a big hit game or in a KT state described later. Therefore, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when the jackpot game or the KT state is in progress, for example, the effect display device 9 displays "right-handed" or the like or moves to the right. It is desirable to configure so as to notify that the right-handed operation period is in progress by displaying an arrow indicating.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame lamps 28a, left frame lamps 28b, and right frame lamps 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball burnout lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the first decorative symbol is variable on the first variable display unit 9a. The display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the second decorative symbol is started on the second variable display unit 9b. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state as a specific state that is advantageous for the player. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). A V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the right to continue may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 2-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the player shifts to the small hit game state as a specific state advantageous to the player. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state. In this embodiment, the small hit game state is a game state as a specific state that is advantageous to the player, although the advantage is lower than that of the big hit game state (in this example, the number of balls that can be obtained is small). Yes, the gaming state does not transition to another gaming state before and after the small hit gaming state. In the small hit game state, 15 prize balls are paid out for each prize.

As described above, in this embodiment, as a specific state advantageous for the player, a first value-grantable state (big hit game state) in which the first game value (opening of the variable winning ball device 20, etc.) can be given to the player. Etc.) and the second value-grantable state (small hit game state, etc.) that can give the player a second game value (opening of the special variable winning ball device 22, etc.) that is less than the first value-grantable state. including.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , An odd number of 0-9) is higher than in the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if the above occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probability change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state will be the same as in the normal state even in the KT state, but when the second special symbol changes. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a firing operation (left-handed) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and then when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, the case where the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly completed when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state is shown, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by hitting right in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and at the same time the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are among the two. The effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stopped symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned.

In addition, at the time of reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the size is slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the variable winning ball device 22 is used. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom member 23 on the back surface side (rear) of the game area 7 when the bottom member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 23 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the slope of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom member 23 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in this state, and the upstream flow path portion 113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 23, A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 23, and a downstream flow path portion 114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 23, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112 is recessed downward from the end portion of the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 on the bottom surface member 23 side, and the special winning openings 24 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 for guiding the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 23 from below.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow path portions bounces toward the glass door frame 2. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape that protrudes forward from the base plate portion 101 or protrudes rearward from the covering portion 117. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion that covers the 114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and game control controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control computer 560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in time series.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and further, the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step FS1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step FS1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode that indicates.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step FS94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step FS19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the big hit determination random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit determination random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. Then, the state of them is determined (switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2: Determine which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5: Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)
In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs the hold storage process (step S27a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, when the CPU 56 inputs a detection signal from the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, the CPU 56 issues a payout control command for specifying one prize ball for payout control. Output to the microphone computer. Further, for example, when the CPU 56 inputs the detection signal from the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 25a, the CPU 56 outputs a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. To do.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 24 and is detected by the second count switch 25a, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect, which will be described later, are not immediately executed but are executed later. However, regarding the payout of prize balls, in the prize ball processing in step S30, when the detection signal from the second count switch 25a is input, the payout control for immediately designating 15 prize balls. A command is output, the ball payout device 97 is driven by the payout control microcomputer, and 15 prize balls are immediately paid out.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 informs the output port of the contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 56 uses the CPU 56. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value shown in the right column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10A is the jackpot determination value.

FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. Each numerical value shown in FIG. 10B is set in the small hit determination table. Further, the numerical value shown in FIG. 10B is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S162B in FIG. 28) may be performed only when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed to obtain a small hit. As already explained, since the right-handed operation is performed in the KT state, the frequency of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is higher than that in the big hit game state.

The CPU 56 extracts the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) at a predetermined time, and when the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 10A, the CPU 56 hits the jackpot with respect to the special symbol. Decide to. Further, when the big hit determination random value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 10 (B), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 10B indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the probability (ratio) of a small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be approximately 1/4. There is. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether or not to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 8b a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. In addition, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 10B is performed, and the lottery process is performed to be approximately 1/4. It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be a forced loss).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a 20% probability, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the process shifts to the second KT state. See steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). Then, the probability change state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit", it is not in the second KT state. It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2213A and S2010 to S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2215B and S2010-S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Twenty-eight types of # 01 to # 28 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 28) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 12B The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes the jackpot display result in the KT state as in the first variation pattern # 07, FIGS. 13 (D) to (F) and FIGS. 14 (G) to (I). As shown in the above, the fluctuation time is set longer than in the case where the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol becomes the small hit display result in the KT state.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special winning opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is reduced. By making the ball hit, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13D, when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of range, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. To. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 13 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 11 Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 13E, when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation is applied. May be decided. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. In this embodiment, it is determined that the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are misses or small hits, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 08 or the second fluctuation pattern # 10. In this case, in the variable display of the background symbol on the effect display device 9, the effect of fanning the pattern is executed, such as reaching or sliding effect.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 12 to # 14. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when it is determined that the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 12 or the second fluctuation pattern # 13 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" A second variation pattern # 14 with a predetermined resurrection display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 5 minutes is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (5 minutes in this example) at least a plurality of small hits can be generated is secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 15 to # 19. Will be done.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the fluctuation time is 5 seconds even when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 15 of the short shortening fluctuation. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 17) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 19 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the second variation pattern # 16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect is included. 18 may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 14 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 20 to # 24 is applied. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the range after the second fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. May be determined as the second fluctuation pattern # 20 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. Further, even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 24 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), even when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, the second fluctuation pattern # 21 and the second fluctuation pattern including the battle effect are included. # 23 may be determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 25 to # 28.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation of the shortening fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the display is executed, may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is further executed in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, a second fluctuation pattern including a continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues is included. It may be decided to be # 26. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 28 including the effect is determined.

When the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes the jackpot display result in the KT state as in the first variation pattern # 07 of FIG. 12 (B), FIGS. 13 (D) to (F) and FIGS. 14 (F) Since the fluctuation time is set longer than in the case where the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol becomes the small hit display result in the KT state as shown in G) to (I) and the like, FIG. When the small hit hold continuous notification effect is executed in the second special symbol, which is a special effect in the KT state as shown in the above, the change display of the first special symbol is performed even though the hold continuous notification effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring first. More specifically, even if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a small hit, are started to be executed at the same time, the small hit of the variable display of the second special symbol is surely digested. To.

Further, the fluctuation time (2 seconds) when the first special symbol is removed during KT in FIG. 12 (B) is the shortest among the fluctuation times when the first special symbol is removed during non-KT in FIG. 12 (A). In a predetermined state such as the KT state, which is shorter than the time (15 seconds), the variable display time when the display result is out of alignment based on the first variable display is based on the first variable display in the non-KT state. By making it shorter than the shortest of the variable display times when the display result is off, the first variable display can be digested earlier, and special features such as the hold continuous notification effect described later for the second variable display can be performed. It is possible to make it less likely that the execution of the effect is restricted.

Further, since the fluctuation time (5 minutes) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown in FIG. 12B is longer than the fluctuation time at the time of the second special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown in FIGS. 13 and 14. , Despite executing a special effect such as the hold continuous notification effect described later regarding the second variable display, the big hit game state based on the first variable display is preceded by the small hit game state based on the second variable display. It is possible to prevent it from being controlled by.

In this embodiment, when a variable pattern including a continuous effect or a battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuous effect or the battle effect in the variable display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

When determining the variation pattern of the shortened variation of the second variation pattern # 04, # 07, # 09, # 15, # 20, # 22, # 25, # 27, for example, it differs depending on the number of reserved storages. It may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation by the ratio. For example, as the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation may be determined at a high rate so that the reserved memories are digested earlier and the operating rate may be increased.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the case of the first KT state and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortening variation of 5 seconds in a low probability state and a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in a high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 15 in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of line, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that the symbol is out of line, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), since the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and it is easy for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. For example, in this embodiment, the winning frequency of the game balls is low as compared with the case where a maximum of 10 game balls can be won per round in the big hit game state, but in the second KT state, one small hit game is in progress. It is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls.

In this embodiment, the "winning frequency" indicates, for example, the winning ratio of the game balls to the large winning opening or the special winning opening 24 with respect to the number of gaming balls fired in the game area 7.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 15 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56). This is done by executing (see step S26C). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) To determine whether or not to make a hit. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. , Determine whether or not to hit the normal map with the same probability.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning is as shown in FIG. 15 (1). A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in the state where the normal symbol is stopped changing and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H) correspond to the variable display of the special symbol and correspond to the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 560 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result specification command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol and the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

In the first start port switch passing process (155FS312 in FIG. 18), which will be described later, whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 will be a big hit when winning the first start winning opening 13, the type of big hit, and the fluctuation pattern. It is determined which judgment value range the value of the random number for type judgment falls within. Then, a value for designating a big hit, a value for designating the type of the big hit, and the like are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 200. Further, in the second start port switch passing process (155FS322 in FIG. 27), which will be described later, whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 is a big hit or a small hit when the second start winning opening 14 is won is a small hit. Whether or not, the type of jackpot, and the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type are determined in which determination value range. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit, a value for designating the type of the big hit, and the like are set, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 200. As a result, in the effect control microcomputer 200, based on the value set in the symbol designation command, whether or not the display result is a big hit, whether or not the display result is a small hit, and whether or not the display result is a small hit at the time of starting winning, and The type of jackpot can be recognized, and the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting opening winning opening 13 (step 155FS311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step 155FS312).

The CPU 56 can determine whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first special symbol are changing by the first special symbol process flag, and determine whether or not the second big hit game is being executed by the second special symbol. It can be judged by the process flag. That is, the CPU 56 determines that the second big hit game or the second small hit game is being executed based on the second special symbol process flag handled in the second special symbol process process.

Next, the value of the second special symbol process flag corresponds to any of the second winning opening pre-opening process to the second small hit end process corresponding to the big hit game state and the small hit game state related to the second special symbol. If (step 155FS314), the process of step 155FS315 and step 155FS316 is executed, and then the first special symbol process process is terminated. If not, after executing the processes of step 155FS317 and step 155FS318, any of the processes of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag). I do. In this embodiment, the values corresponding to the second big hit symbol stop process to the second small hit end process are continuous values. Therefore, the determination process of step 155FS314 of the CPU 56 can be simplified.

In step 155FS315, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the condition that the first special symbol is being changed and the first interruption designation command has not been transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 is satisfied. .. If it is not fluctuating, or if the first interruption designation command has already been transmitted even if it is fluctuating (when the transmitted flag of the first interruption designation command is set), the process ends. On the other hand, in step 155FS315, when it is changing and the first interruption designation command has not been transmitted yet (when the transmission flag of the first interruption designation command is not set), the effect control microcomputer 200 is used. The first interruption designation command is transmitted (step 155FS316), and the process ends. In step 155FS316, the transmitted flag is set when the first interruption designation command is transmitted. When the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the first interruption designation command, the effect control microcomputer 200 interrupts the fluctuation (variable display) of the first decorative symbol.

Further, when the value does not correspond to any of the second winning opening pre-opening process to the second small hit end process in step 155FS314, that is, when it does not correspond to the big hit game state and the small hit game state related to the second special symbol. , The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first interruption designation command according to step 155FS316 has been transmitted by confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set (step 155FS317). When it is not after the first interruption designation command is transmitted (when the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is not interrupted), any of steps S300 to S307 is performed. On the other hand, after the first suspension designation command is transmitted (when the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is interrupted), the first restart designation command is transmitted (step 155FS318), and the steps S300 to S307 are performed. Perform either process. In step 155FS318, the transmitted flag set in step 155FS316 is reset when the first interruption designation command is transmitted. Upon receiving the first restart designation command, the effect control microcomputer 200 restarts the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol.

By step 155FS314 to step 155FS318, identification such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol. When controlled to the state, regarding the variable display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, after the variable display is interrupted, the interrupted variable display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is performed after the end of the specific state. The control that enables the restart is executed.

The processes of steps S300 to S307 are as follows.
First special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process (step S32) based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S22, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the jackpot game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the grand prize opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step 155FS312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). Is 4 or not) (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

Next, by executing the same jackpot determination and variation pattern type determination as at the start of the variation based on the random numbers extracted in S215, the variation display result when the variation based on the current start prize is subsequently executed. And the variation pattern type are determined in advance at the time of starting winning (S216).

Then, based on the determination result in S216, the first effective start prize designation command (S217), the symbol designation command (S218), and the variation type designation command (S219) are sequentially executed as commands corresponding to the current start prize. Send and end the process.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5). Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. The hold storage information of the first hold storage buffer is called the first hold storage information. The hold storage information of the second hold storage buffer is called the second hold storage information.

Further, the control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S219).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0". In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0", it means that the first special symbol display 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is the first. This is a case where the jackpot game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times) is not in progress.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S50A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S51A). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally terminated. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the transmission of the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. In addition to storing in the first random number buffer area of (step S53A), the value of the first reserved storage area is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability change flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High accuracy / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is determined to be high accuracy / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send a background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S63A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processing after step S64A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S63A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S63A, steps S64A to S161A A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number may be used) without performing the above processing. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. .. Further, when the big hit is not made in step S66A (that is, when it is a miss), the process proceeds to step S68A.

Cases in which it is determined in step S63A that the second special symbol is not undergoing a big hit fluctuation include an out-of-order fluctuation and a small hit fluctuation. Therefore, during the fluctuation in which the second special symbol becomes a small hit, the big hit determination in step S65A can be executed for the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68A is determined.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the game state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is used is determined (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and changes. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S1702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the designated command (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the process of step S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. It is stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a in the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the first decorative symbol based on the first display result designation command transmitted in step S302.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 27, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step 155FS312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step 155FS322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, It is configured to store a new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state is “0” (step S2010), and in “0”. If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S2011) to see if it becomes "0". (Step S2012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state is completed, the CPU 56 resets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state ( Step S2013) and step S2014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S2019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2020).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-opening process. Set to the corresponding value (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 17 The game ball has passed through the game and is detected by the operating gate switch 17a, so that the game shifts to the big hit game.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203A), and the process ends.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that it is in a probability change state and shifts to a probability change state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 (step 155FS321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step 155FS322).

The CPU 56 can determine that the first big hit game is being executed based on the first special symbol process flag handled in the first special symbol process process.

Next, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to any of the first winning opening pre-opening process to the first jackpot end process corresponding to the jackpot gaming state related to the first special symbol ( After executing the processes of step 155FS324), step 155FS325, and step 155FS326, the second special symbol process process is terminated. If not, after executing the processes of step 155FS327 and step 155FS328, any of steps S350 to S360 is processed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag). I do. In this embodiment, the values corresponding to the second big hit symbol stop process to the second small hit end process are continuous values. Therefore, the determination process of step 155FS324 of the CPU 56 can be simplified.

In step 155FS325, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the condition that the first special symbol is being changed and the first interruption designation command has not been transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 is satisfied. .. If it is not fluctuating, or if the first interruption designation command has already been transmitted even if it is fluctuating (when the transmitted flag of the first interruption designation command is set), the process ends. On the other hand, in step 155FS325, when the fluctuation is in progress and the first interruption designation command has not yet been transmitted (when the transmission flag of the first interruption designation command has not been set), the effect control microcomputer 200 is used. The first interruption designation command is transmitted (step 155FS326), and the process ends. In step 155FS326, the transmitted flag is set when the first interruption designation command is transmitted. When the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the first interruption designation command, the effect control microcomputer 200 interrupts the fluctuation (variable display) of the first decorative symbol.

Further, if the value does not correspond to any of the first winning opening pre-opening process to the first jackpot end process in step 155FS324, that is, if it does not correspond to the jackpot game state related to the first special symbol, the CPU 56 has already transmitted. By confirming whether or not the flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the first interruption designation command by step 155FS326 has been transmitted (step 155FS327). When it is not after the first interruption designation command is transmitted (when the variation of the second decorative symbol is not interrupted), any of steps S350 to S360 is performed. On the other hand, after the first suspension designation command is transmitted (when the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is interrupted), the first restart designation command is transmitted (step 155FS328), and the steps S350 to S360 are performed. Perform either process. In step 155FS328, the transmitted flag set in step 155FS326 is reset when the first interruption designation command is transmitted. Upon receiving the first restart designation command, the effect control microcomputer 200 restarts the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol.

From step 155FS324 to step 155FS328, it is controlled to a specific state such as a jackpot game state based on the variable display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. When the variable display of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is interrupted, the interrupted variable display of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol can be resumed after the end of the specific state. Control is executed.

The processes of steps S350 to S360 are as follows.
Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit. If it is a small hit, set the small hit flag. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (second special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is set to be off (including the case where it is forcibly missed)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S350. Update to a value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the second large winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second big winning opening opening processing (step S356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the jackpot game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the grand prize opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 has elapsed by 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the second count switch 25a detects the game ball, the control is performed to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is "0". The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is "0" means that the second special symbol display 8b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is second. This is a case where neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S50B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the second reserved storage number is 0, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished (step S51B). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally terminated. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the transmission of the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S63B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S162B.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). .. Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot (step S160B), the jackpot type is stored (step S161B), and the step Move to S68B.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the small hit determination module when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S63B and when the big hit is not made in step S66B (step S162B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit determination random number (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value to be a small hit. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S163B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S164B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68B is determined.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

In the first special symbol normal processing of FIG. 21, the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol is restricted only when the second special symbol is undergoing jackpot fluctuation, and in the second special symbol normal processing of FIG. 28, the first special The execution of the variation display of the second special symbol is restricted only when the symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation. Therefore, except for a special state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. The simultaneous variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may occur depending on the left and right striking modes of the player's firing operation, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the game area 7, and the like.

Further, in the second special symbol normal processing of FIG. 28, when the first special symbol is undergoing a big hit fluctuation, the big hit determination is not executed, but the small hit determination can be executed. As a result, the variable display that is a big hit in the first special symbol and the variable display that is a big hit in the second special symbol are not executed at the same time. When the first special symbol is undergoing a big hit variation, the second special symbol variation display is executed as a small hit variation display or a variable display resulting in a missed display result. After the end of the big hit game state based on the variable display that becomes a big hit with such a second special symbol, the variable display can be executed simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit. Based on the type determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. Controls transmission.

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

In the second special symbol stop process (step S354), substantially the same process as the first special symbol stop process (step S304) shown in FIG. 24 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 24, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol stop process is generally explained. However, in the second special symbol stop processing, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening pre-processing (step S358). ..

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S2208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S2208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the start of the jackpot, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2209B). If the player is in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

By executing the processes of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is reached before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT count counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like is performed (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. In addition, the background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a prize ball number display process for controlling the display of the prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired by winning the prize in the large prize opening is executed (step S707). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S708). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S709). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

31 to 33 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received.

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is low accuracy / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S631). Further, if the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag (step S632). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the prize ball count counter for counting the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) (step S633), and displays the effect. If the prize ball number display is displayed on the device 9, control is performed to erase the prize ball number display (step S634).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S635), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S636). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S637). Further, if the probability change state flag indicating that the effect is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that the state is in the second KT state are set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag. (Step S638).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S640), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S641). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S642). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second KT state flag if the second KT state flag is set (step S643).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S645), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S646). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S647). Further, if the first KT state flag is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag (step S648).

If the received production control command is a large winning opening winning designation command (step S650), the production control CPU 201 sets a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the large winning opening (step S650). Along with step S651), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the large winning opening) is added to the prize ball counter (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 24. Along with (step S654), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the special winning opening 24) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S655).

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same 15 when the game ball is won in the large winning opening and when the game ball is won in the special winning opening 24 is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball wins in the large winning opening, while the number of winning balls is set to 10 when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24. You may.

If the received effect control command is the first effective start prize designation command (step S656A), the first effective start prize flag indicating that the command has been received is set (step S656B), and the process proceeds to step S611. If the received effect control command is the second effective start winning designation command (step S656C), the second valid starting winning flag indicating that the command has been received is set (step S656D), and the process proceeds to step S611.

If the received effect control command is a symbol designation command (step S656E), the symbol designation command at the time of either the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 Is determined based on which of the first and second effective start winning flags set in S656A to S656D is set, and the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer is set. The symbol designation data designated by the received command is stored in (step S656F), and the process proceeds to step S611.

The reception command buffer at the time of the first start winning is the game control micro in the order of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 based on the reception of the first valid starting winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation type designation command. Similar to the first hold storage information in the computer 560, this is a buffer area for storing four jackpot determination information and variation pattern type determination information at the time of starting winning for the variation display that has not been executed yet.

The reception command buffer at the time of the second start motion prize is for game control for the start prize to the second start prize opening 14 based on the reception of the second valid start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation type designation command. Similar to the second hold storage information in the microcomputer 560, a buffer area for storing one big hit judgment information, a small hit judgment state, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment information at the time of starting winning for a fluctuation display that has not been executed yet. Is. These buffer areas are provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 200.

As for the information stored in the received command buffer at the time of the first start winning, the information about the first start winning is deleted in the corresponding variable display, the storage location is shifted, and the new free space is filled with the information about the new first start winning. It is stored. As for the information stored in the received command buffer at the time of the second start winning, the information in which the corresponding variable display is executed is deleted, and the information regarding the new second start winning is stored in the new free area.

If the received effect control command is a variable type specification command (step S656G), the symbol is specified at the time of either the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14. Whether it is a command is determined based on which of the first and second effective start winning flags set in S656A to S656D is set, and the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command is received. The variation type specification data specified by the received command is stored in the buffer (step S656H), and the process proceeds to step S611. As a result, a maximum of four jackpot determination results and variation type determination results are stored in the first start winning command buffer in the order of starting winning. On the other hand, in the second start winning command buffer, only one jackpot determination result and the variation type determination result are stored in association with each other.

By storing various determination data at the time of starting winning in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer in accordance with the hold storage information, the effect control microcomputer 200 Can recognize the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information, similarly to the game control microcomputer 560.

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo display designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the customer waiting demonstration display (step S661).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 201 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S670). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

[Holding continuous notification effect during KT state]
Next, the hold continuous notification effect during the KT state in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, in the KT state such as the first KT state and the second KT state, the second variable display that has not been started yet is pre-read the second reserved storage information when controlled to a specific state. As a special effect, a hold continuous notification effect may be executed based on the determination that the specific state is controlled.

In this embodiment, as the hold continuous notification effect, a special effect is executed when the variable display based on the second hold storage information becomes the small hit display result when the small hit game state is controlled as a specific state. An example of executing a small hit hold continuous notification effect will be described. In addition, as the hold ream notification effect, when the small hit game state is controlled as a specific state, the big hit hold rendition that executes a special effect when the variation display based on the second hold storage information becomes the big hit display result. The notification effect may be executed.

In addition, as the hold continuous notification effect, when the specific state is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit hold for executing the special effect when the variation display based on the second hold storage information becomes the small hit display result. The continuous notification effect may be executed. In addition, as the hold continuous notification effect, when the jackpot game state is controlled as a specific state, a special effect is executed when the variable display based on the second hold storage information becomes the big hit display result. You may try to perform the production.

Next, the production in the KT state will be described. In the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game state, there is a case where a small hit such as a first KT state or a second KT state is likely to occur in a KT state. As described above, in the first KT state, even if a small hit occurs, it is difficult to obtain a ball (prize ball) by winning a prize in the special winning opening, and it is difficult to increase the number of balls held. On the other hand, in the second KT state, when a small hit occurs, it is easy to get a ball (prize ball) by winning a prize in the special winning opening, and it is easy to increase the number of balls held.

FIG. 34 is an effect drawing showing an effect executed by the effect display device 9 during the KT state. When the KT state is reached after the jackpot game state ends, the screen in the KT state is displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (a). In the KT state, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), the effect display device 9 performs a right-handed operation, so that the second variable display unit 9b and the background symbol display unit 9c (left / middle / right) are mainly used. Variable display is executed in (three display areas) (the downward direction in the design and the arrow indicate the changing state). Further, in the upper left of the screen on the effect display device 9, a total acquired image 194 showing the total number of the acquired balls acquired by the big hit and the balls in the KT state is displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, the characters "RUSH" indicating that the KT state is currently in progress are displayed.

When the small hit display result is obtained from the fluctuation state of FIG. 34 (a), as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the combination of even-numbered symbols of "222" indicating that the small hit state is controlled as the display result is used. Is displayed. The white even-numbered symbols in FIG. 34 (b) are blue. Further, in the lower center of the screen, a small hit ball acquisition effect is executed in which the balls acquired during the small hit are displayed as, for example, the first acquired image 197 of the characters "+15".

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the special variable winning ball device 22 is detected to win the game ball in the small hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 22 wins the game ball. The first acquired image 197 that informs that is displayed. If such a small hit ball acquisition effect is executed, it is clearly notified that the game ball has been acquired, so it is easy to understand that the small hit state has been controlled, and it is possible to give momentum to the effect. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when the small hit state is controlled.

Further, when the small hit display result is obtained from the fluctuation state of FIG. 34 (a) and the second hold storage information includes the hold storage information controlled to the small hit state, FIG. 34 (c) shows. Such a small hit ball acquisition production is performed. In FIG. 34 (c), as in FIG. 34 (b), a combination of even-numbered symbols of “222” indicating that the small hit state is controlled as a display result is displayed. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 is detected to win the game ball in the small hit game state, the first acquired image notifying that the special variable winning ball device 22 has won the game ball. Instead of displaying 197, as a special effect, a small hit ball acquisition effect is executed in the lower center of the screen, in which the balls acquired during the small hit are displayed as the second acquired image 198 with the characters "GET". To. The payout acquisition effect (in this example, the effect of displaying the second acquired image 198 of the character "GET") executed when the second reserved memory has the reserved memory information controlled to the small hit state is , It is a special effect called a hold continuous notification effect that notifies that the hold storage information has a hold memory controlled to a small hit state.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the second hold storage information includes the hold storage information controlled to the small hit state in the small hit state, the hold continuous notification effect for notifying the fact is executed. , As shown in FIG. 34 (c), the first acquired image 197 and the second reserved storage when there is no reserved storage information determined to be controlled in the small hit state in the second reserved storage information during the small hit state. It is displayed in a different manner from the second acquired image 198 when the information includes the reserved storage information determined to be controlled in the small hit state. In this way, when there is the second reserved storage information determined to be controlled in the small hit state, the player can be given a special feeling. Therefore, it is possible to have expectations for the future gaming state.

Next, when the probability variation jackpot is changed from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (high probability / first KT state or high probability / second KT state), the screen as shown in FIG. 34 (d) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 34 (d), a probability variation jackpot symbol composed of a combination of odd-numbered symbols of "777" indicating that the probability variation jackpot state is controlled as a display result is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the probability variation jackpot is started, and the image corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is displayed. The filled odd-numbered symbol in FIG. 23 (d) is red. It should be noted that the type of the probabilistic big hit symbol may be different between the high probability / first KT state in which the ball ejection by the small hit cannot be expected and the high probability / second KT state in which the ball ejection by the small hit can be expected. For example, when it is in the high probability / first KT state, it is displayed with an odd number of "333", and when it is in the high probability / second KT state, it is displayed as "777" to give a special feeling. Further, the color of the numbers may be different between the "3" symbol and the "7" symbol.

Further, when a normal big hit is obtained from the state of FIG. 34 (a) (low probability / first KT state), as shown in FIG. 34 (f), a symbol of "END" indicating the end of the KT state is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the big hit game state of the normal big hit is started, and the image corresponding to the normal big hit is displayed. Further, after the end of the normal jackpot, when the fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state 100 times is completed, the non-KT state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 34, the display result includes a small hit display result composed of a combination of blue symbols shown in FIG. 34 (b) and a probability variation jackpot composed of a combination of red symbols shown in FIG. 34 (d). The display result and is included. Then, when the small hit display result is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the small hit state, and when the probability variation big hit display result is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the big hit state. In this way, by making the display result different depending on whether it is the small hit display result or the big hit display result, the controlled game state can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this way, when the second variable display is controlled to a specific state such as the small hit game state based on the second variable display, the second variable display that has not yet been started by pre-reading is in a specific state such as the small hit game state. By making it possible to execute a special effect such as a hold continuous notification effect based on the determination that the control is performed, the special effect can improve the interest of the game.

Then, as a special effect, the effect of notifying the player's acquired ball in the small hit game state is notified of the player's acquired ball in the big hit game state such as "1600 GET" in FIGS. 34 (d) to (g). By executing the effect in an effect mode such as "GET" in FIG. 34 (c), which is different from the effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by a special effect such as a hold continuous notification effect.

Next, the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table for selecting and determining whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification effect shown in FIG. 34 will be described. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the presence / absence of a hold continuous notification effect. The hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table is stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 200.

In the table for determining the presence / absence of the hold continuous notification effect of FIG. 35, a total of 150 random numbers SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 149) for determining the presence / absence of the hold continuous notification effect execution as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 200. The numbers are assigned to "execute" and "do not execute". For SR2, the number of allocated random number SR2 values is shown for the sake of clarity. In the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, data is set so that the ratio of the magnitude relationship of "execute> not execute" is determined by the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. The magnitude relationship of the ratio may be the opposite.

Next, a process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 for performing the small hit hold continuous notification effect in the small hit game state in the KT state shown in FIG. 34 will be described. The background symbol process process of FIG. 30 includes a process of the small hit opening pre-effect processing, a process of the small hit opening middle effect processing, and a large hit process of the small hit end effect processing as the process related to the small hit. The process of the small hit pre-opening effect processing is a process for executing the effect before the special winning opening 24 is opened in the small hit game state. The process of the small hit opening effect processing is a process for executing the effect while the special winning opening 24 is open in the small hit game state. The process of the big hit process of the small hit end effect process is a process for executing the small hit end effect after the special winning opening 24 is closed in the small hit game state. These processes are executed in the order of the small hit opening pre-opening effect process, the small hit opening effect process, and the small hit end effect process. The small hit pre-opening effect process is executed in response to the reception of the small hit start designation command. The small hit end effect process is executed in response to the reception of the small hit end designation command.

In the small hit game state in the KT state shown in FIG. 34, the small hit hold continuous notification effect includes the hold continuous notification effect setting process that constitutes a part of the small hit pre-opening effect process and the small hit open during effect process. It is executed by using the small hit ball acquisition effect processing that constitutes a part.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hold continuous notification effect setting process and a small hit payout acquisition effect process. FIG. 36 (A) shows the hold continuous notification effect setting process, and FIG. 36 (B) shows the small hit ball output acquisition effect process.

In the hold continuous notification effect setting process of FIG. 36 (A), the effect control CPU 201 executes the following process. First, it is confirmed by the hold look-ahead based on the data of the received command buffer at the time of the second start winning, whether or not the second hold storage information includes the hold storage information which is a small hit (step 155FS520). If the second reserved storage information does not include the reserved storage information that is a small hit, the process ends. On the other hand, when the second reserved storage information includes the reserved storage information that is a small hit, the first special symbol is being changed by checking the process being executed in the first decorative symbol process process (S705A). It is confirmed whether or not (step 155FS521).

When the first special symbol is changing, the process ends. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not changing, it is confirmed whether or not the first hold storage number is 1 or more by the hold look-ahead based on the data of the above-mentioned first start winning command buffer (step 155FS522). ). When the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the process ends. On the other hand, when the first hold storage number is not 1 or more, the value of SR2 is extracted, and the presence / absence of execution of the hold continuous notification effect is selected and determined using the hold continuous notification effect determination table of FIG. 35 (step 155FS523). .. Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed (step 155FS524). If it is not determined whether the hold continuous notification effect is executed (determined not to be executed), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold continuous notification effect is to be executed, the hold continuous notification effect presence flag is set (step 155FS525), and the process is terminated.

In this way, in the small hit game state in the KT state, when the second hold storage information includes the hold storage information that is the small hit display result, the hold continuous notification effect can be executed at a predetermined rate of less than 100% by lottery. As described above, whether or not to execute the hold notification effect is determined. In the small hit game state in the KT state, when the second hold storage information includes the hold storage information that is the small hit display result, the hold continuous notification effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

Further, when the step 155FS521 controls the specific state such as the small hit game state based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, a special effect such as a hold continuous notification effect is provided in the specific state. Execution is restricted (prohibited). As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of an unintended advantageous state for the player based on the first variable display even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed, and the effect by the special effect can be reduced. It is possible to improve the fun of.

Further, when the first hold storage number is 1 or more and is controlled to a specific state such as a small hit game state based on the second variable display by step 155FS522, the hold continuous notification effect is performed in the specific state. The execution of special effects is restricted (prohibited). In this way, even when the first hold storage information is stored while being controlled to a specific state based on the second variable display, the execution of the special effect is restricted, so that the special effect related to the second variable display is restricted. Despite the execution of the above, it is possible to further reduce the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player based on the first variable display that is not intended in the production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11 and the like, there are a plurality of types of jackpot types such as a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot in the jackpot game state based on the first variable display, and execution of a special effect for the second variable display. Due to the limitation of, even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed, when it is controlled to a specific state such as the big hit game state based on the first variable display, like the normal big hit big hit game state, It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being significantly reduced when the specific state is the one that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the small hit payout acquisition effect process of FIG. 36B, the effect control CPU 201 executes the following process. First, when the detection of winning in the special winning opening 24 is detected, it is confirmed whether or not the special winning opening winning flag set based on the reception of the special winning opening winning designation command is set (step 155FS530). ). If the special winning opening winning flag is not set, the process ends. On the other hand, when the special winning opening winning flag is set, the special winning opening winning flag is reset (step 155FS531). In this case, since there is a prize while the special winning opening 24 for the small hit is open, the ball ejection effect at the time of the small hit can be obtained by either the display mode shown in FIG. 34 (b) or FIG. 34 (c). Execute.

After resetting the special winning opening winning flag, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned pending continuous notification effect setting flag is set (step 155FS532). When the flag with hold continuous notification effect is not set, a small hit ball output acquisition effect without hold continuous notification effect as shown in FIG. 34 (b) is set and executed (step 155FS533), and the process ends. .. On the other hand, when the flag with the hold continuous notification effect is set, the small hit ball output acquisition effect with the hold continuous notification effect as shown in FIG. 34 (c) is set and executed (step 155FS534), and a special prize is won. The mouth winning flag is reset (step 155FS535), and the process ends.

Further, in the hold continuous notification effect setting process of FIG. 36, two conditions are set: when the first special symbol is changing (155FS521) and when the first hold storage number is 1 or more (155FS522). Although an example used for limiting the hold continuous notification effect has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of these conditions may be used as a condition for limiting the hold continuous notification effect.

The payout acquisition effect based on the winning of the large winning opening shown in FIG. 34 is executed in the prize ball number display process of FIG. The small hit ball output acquisition effect and the hold continuous notification effect in the KT state executed based on the processes such as the hold continuous notification effect setting process and the small hit ball output acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 36 are the prizes of FIG. In the ball number display process, it may be executed together with the ball output acquisition effect in the big hit game state.

As shown in steps 155FS520 to 155FS523, 155FS532,155FS534, etc. in FIG. 36, when the second variable display is controlled to a specific state such as a small hit game state based on the second variable display, the second variable display is determined by pre-reading determination. Based on the determination that the small hit game state is controlled, a special effect such as a hold continuous notification effect can be executed, so that the special effect can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example of hold continuous notification effect setting process and small hit ball acquisition effect process]
Next, a modified example of the hold continuous notification effect setting process and the small hit ball output acquisition effect process described with reference to FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the hold continuous notification effect setting process and the small hit payout acquisition effect process.

The process of FIG. 37 is different from the process of FIG. 36 in that step 155FS521A and step 155FS522B are provided instead of step 155FS521 and step 155FS522 of FIG. In the hold continuous notification effect setting process of FIG. 37 (A), if there is hold storage information that becomes a small hit in the second hold storage information in step 155FS520, first, in the data of the above-mentioned first start winning command buffer. Based on the hold look-ahead, it is confirmed whether or not there is hold storage information that is a jackpot display result in the first hold storage information (step 155FS521A). When there is hold storage information that is a jackpot display result in the first hold storage information, the process ends. On the other hand, when there is no hold storage information that is a jackpot display result in the first hold storage information, it is confirmed whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step 155FS522B). When the first special symbol is changing, the process ends. On the other hand, when the first reserved storage number is not 1 or more, the same process of step 155FS523 as in FIG. 36 is executed.

In the hold continuous notification effect setting process of FIG. 37, when there is hold storage information which is a jackpot display result in the first hold storage information (155FS521A) and when the first special symbol is changing (155FS522B). An example is shown in which the above two conditions are used to limit the hold continuous notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of these conditions is also used as a condition for limiting the hold continuous notification effect. You may.

In such a modification, in step 155FS521A, when there is hold storage information that is a jackpot display result in the first hold storage information, it is controlled to a specific state such as a small hit game state based on the second variable display. In that case, the execution of a special effect such as the hold continuous notification effect is restricted (prohibited) in the specific state. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player based on the first variable display, which is not intended in the effect, even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed. It is possible to improve the fun of the production by.

Among the effect controls related to the hold continuous notification effect shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the control for limiting the hold continuous notification effect as shown in 155FS521, 155FS522 in FIG. 36 and 155FS521A, 155FS522B in FIG. 37 is an effect. (Prohibition of effect execution) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect execution rate is executed at a certain rate, but the execution rate may be lower than a predetermined rate. That is, among the effect controls related to the hold continuous notification effect shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, as the control for limiting the hold continuous notification effect, in addition to the control for prohibiting the execution of the effect, the control for lowering the execution ratio of the effect is performed. You may want to do it.

[Modified example of prize ball number display processing]
Next, a modified example of the prize ball number display processing (S707) will be described. Also in the prize ball number display process described below, the effect control (including the effect limit control) related to the hold continuous notification effect as shown in FIG. 34C may be executed. In the command analysis process described above, the effect control CPU 201 may control the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern. For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the first KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

Further, in the command analysis process described above, the effect control CPU 201 may control the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern. For example, the prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the second KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the first KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

In such a case, the number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game or during the KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state), but when the KT state is ended and the low probability / non-KT state is returned, the prize is awarded. When the value of the ball count counter is reset (cleared to 0), the display of the prize ball count display ends.

38 to 41 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (step S707). In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step S500). If the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning opening is winning), the effect control CPU 201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S501), and the first prize It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S502). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S506.

If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is the effect ball at the first speed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S503). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S504). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or during the KT state (first KT state, second KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big prize opening When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 or the special winning opening 24, a prize ball increasing effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display is increased one by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of prize ball increase effects: the first prize ball increase effect to the third prize ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed during the jackpot game. It is an effect that is executed in such a way as to do. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 second) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one.

In this embodiment, the fact that the big prize opening prize flag is set (a prize has occurred in the big winning opening) means that the big hit game is in progress and the number of prize balls displayed by the big hit pattern is displayed. Therefore, in the prize ball number display displayed by the jackpot pattern in step S503, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed is started.

If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the big winning opening), the effect control CPU 201 is set whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S505). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, unless the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S510.

If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S502 or step S505 (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 is awarded in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S507). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize balls at the first speed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S508). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S509), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this embodiment, when a prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball count counter. However, by executing the processes of steps S500 to S509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but the first speed (this example). Then, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the prize ball number increases by 1 in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of all 15 prize balls for one prize in the large prize opening. The number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next big prize opening will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 prize balls. Even if a prize is awarded to the next big prize opening at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is performed only up to, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls will continue to increase is displayed. We, the first prize ball increase production will continue to be executed until the increase display of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case, addition). The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in.) However, in this embodiment, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the jackpot game is ended. By the end of the production, the number of prize balls will increase.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if winning the special winning opening 24 has occurred), the effect control CPU 201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S511), and the second KT It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S512). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is rarely generated in the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state, since the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, the process is terminated as it is without performing the prize ball increase effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, during the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 is executing the second prize ball increase effect indicating that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S514). If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S519.

If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is the effect ball at the first speed in the effect display device 9. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S515). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 sets the second prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S516). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S515, the first KT pattern is used. In the displayed number of prize balls display, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the special winning opening 24), the third winning ball increase effect is executed, which indicates that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S517). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S533. If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 201 is set with the second prize ball increase effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S518). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, the second prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S514 or step S518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 is awarded in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S520). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize balls at the first speed on the effect display device 9. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S521). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S522), the second prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game generated during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and immediately. 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S655), but the prize ball number display may be immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processing of steps S510 to S522. Instead, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, for one prize in the special prize opening 24, 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 24 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 24 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is completed. By the time, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S512 (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the effect effect (step S523). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S524). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S525). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

If the winning effect execution flag is not set (that is, the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball increase on the effect display device 9 (for example, character display such as "+15"). Is performed (step S526), and the effect display device 9 is controlled to start the winning effect (step S527). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the winning effect executing flag (step S528). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S529). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S533.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S530). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed and to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S531). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the third prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S532). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S531, the second KT pattern is used. In the displayed and enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize ball increase effect is started in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S517 or step S529 (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 determines the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is determined by, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the effect effect (step S534).

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 201 has completed the display of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the display of the number of prize balls (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started Whether or not) is confirmed (step S535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S536). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize balls at the second speed on the effect display device 9. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control for starting the third prize ball increase effect is performed (step S537). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the second KT pattern on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to end the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S538). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S539), and ends the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game generated during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S655), 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number display by executing the processes of steps S510, S517, S529 to S532, S535-S539. The number of prize balls is enlarged and displayed as the effect effect is executed, and the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 24 in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds x 15 = 7.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 24 will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 24 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated).

Here, in this embodiment, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. In some cases, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls may not be completed. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the 3rd prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the 3rd prize will be displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is completed. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (furthermore, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect execution flag is set (step S540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is determined by, for example, setting a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect when starting the winning effect in step S527, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the winning effect (step S542).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S544). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) (step S545), and starts the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball. Control is performed (step S546).

If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S547).

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S524 to S528 and S540 to S547 is executed and a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the prize ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, a prize-winning effect is executed. In this case, a new prize may be generated for the next special winning opening 24 during the execution of the winning effect. In such a case, the winning effect being executed is waited until the execution of the winning effect is completed. After the executing prize-winning effect is completed, the next prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed later).

Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are displayed by the end of the small hit game. It may not be possible. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, so if the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is completed. The prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (furthermore, the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display in between).

In this embodiment, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 24 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 24 is won. (See steps S523, S533, S534).

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display and a prize production are executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24. For example, the special prize opening lamp 24a is further used. It may be configured to be lit.

Further, in this embodiment, there is a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special prize opening 24, and the effect that the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a game machine configured to have a so-called general winning opening (a winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls is paid out without opening the variable winning ball device even if a winning is made). In the above, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one. In this case, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls is uniformly increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a prize is entered in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase production. You may perform a directing effect. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the prize ball is increased. May be configured not to execute.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in this embodiment will be described. 42 to 45 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect. Of these, FIG. 42 shows a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 43 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIGS. 44 and 45 show specific examples of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 45, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIG. 42, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 300 according to the jackpot pattern, and for example, the character 301 is displayed, and the character 301 is displayed. A case where a character display 302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a dialogue is shown. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the prize ball number display 300 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 300 based on the jackpot pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42B, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S500 to S509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 42 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 43A, when the first KT state is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 303 according to the first KT pattern, and when a small hit occurs, the prize ball number display 303 is displayed. For example, a case where a character display 304 such as "small hit occurs!" Is displayed is shown. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, as the prize ball number display 303 according to the first KT pattern, the case where the prize ball number display 303 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. ing.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43B, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and the second prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S510 to S522). ). In this embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 43 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 44 (A), in the second KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 305 according to the second KT pattern (see step S649), and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a character display 306 such as "Small hit occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the prize ball number display 305 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 305 according to the second KT pattern. It is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 9 (see step S523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 305 is started (see step S530). In the example shown in FIG. 44 (B), as an effect effect, a case where a predetermined effect image 307 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 305 is shown. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special prize opening 24, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), a prize ball increase display is displayed (see step S526) and a prize effect is started (see step S527). In the example shown in FIG. 44B, there is a case where a predetermined character 308 is displayed as a winning effect and a character display 309 such as “+15” is displayed as a prize ball increase display. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed is started in the effect display device 9, and the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 3 is started (steps S510, S517, S529). (See S539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 44 (C) to 45 (H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second prize ball increase effect is compared with the first prize ball increase effect and the second prize ball increase effect. The prize ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed (the winning effect is continuing), and a new prize is generated in the next special winning opening 24 during the execution of the winning effect. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 45 (E), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 9 (see step S523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, it is assumed that the effect effect is completed as shown in FIG. 45 (F), and further, it is assumed that the winning effect is completed as shown in FIG. 45 (G). Then, when the winning effect is completed, the prize ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S526) and the prize is won, as shown in FIG. 45 (H), based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting prize effect. The production is started (see step S527).

After that, until all the prize ball number displays including the number of prize balls based on the prizes to the special prize opening 24 additionally generated in FIG. 45 (E) are updated, the second prize ball increase effect is performed. Will be executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, as an effect effect, a case is shown in which an effect image 307 with a glittering mode is displayed around the prize ball number display 305, but the effect is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, as an effect effect, it may be configured to perform an effect that acts on the prize ball number display 305 in some form, such as displaying an image in a mode that covers the prize ball number display 305. By acting on the prize ball number display 305 in this way, an effect that makes the prize ball number display 305 difficult to see may be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls. Not limited to this, the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. 42, and the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second KT is near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. 44 (A). The number of prize balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately and independently).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state ends once and the big hit game starts, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the prize ball number display displayed during the big hit game. It may be configured to add up and display the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state until the KT state is terminated and the non-KT state is entered. It may be configured. According to the aspect (2), it is possible to improve the interest in the game by recognizing the number of prize balls acquired only in the KT state.

Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 46 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 46, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated while the special prize opening 24 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S530). (See) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started, the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S510, S517, S529 to S539), and the effect effect is executed (step). See S523). Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 46, in the small hit game in the second KT state, if the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increase effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the number of prize balls increased by the second prize is taken over, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 46, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second prize is generated, the winning effect for the second prize is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. 46. In addition, after finishing the winning effect for the first prize, the winning effect for the second prize is executed later.

After that, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, the display of all prize balls is updated in the third prize ball increase production. If it is not finished, or if all the winning effects are not finished, as shown in FIG. 46, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished, and even in the next small hit game, It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increase production and the winning production.

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) When the step 155FS521 of FIG. 36 is controlled to a specific state such as a small hit game state based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, the hold continuous notification effect is performed in the specific state. Execution of special effects is restricted (prohibited). As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of an unintended advantageous state for the player based on the first variable display even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed, and the effect by the special effect can be reduced. It is possible to improve the fun of.

(2) As shown in FIG. 11 and the like, there are a plurality of types of jackpots such as a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot in the jackpot game state based on the first variable display, but a special effect for the second variable display is provided. Due to the limitation of execution, even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed, when it is controlled to a specific state such as the jackpot game state based on the first variable display, it is like the normal jackpot game state. , It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being significantly reduced when the specific state is the one that is disadvantageous to the player.

(3) As shown in steps 155FS520 to 155FS523, 155FS532, 155FS534 and the like in FIG. 36, the interest of the game can be improved by a special effect.

(4) As a special effect, the effect of notifying the player's acquired ball in the small hit game state is executed in a different direction from the effect of notifying the player's acquired ball in the big hit game state, thereby performing a hold continuous notification effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by a special production such as.

(5) As shown in step 155FS522 of FIG. 36, when the first reserved storage number is 1 or more and is controlled to a specific state such as a small hit game state based on the second variable display, the specific state Since the execution of a special effect such as the hold continuous notification effect is restricted (prohibited) in, a player based on the first variable display that is not intended in the effect even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed. It is possible to further reduce the occurrence of favorable conditions.

(6) As shown in FIG. 12, the fluctuation time (2 seconds) at the time of the first special symbol at the time of KT in FIG. 12 (B) is the deviation of the first special symbol at the time of non-KT in FIG. 12 (A). In a predetermined state such as a KT state, such as shorter than the shortest time (15 seconds) of the time fluctuation time, the variable display time when an off-display result is obtained based on the first variable display is in the non-KT state. , The first variable display can be digested earlier by being shorter than the shortest of the variable display times when the display result is out of alignment based on the first variable display, and the second variable display is held. It is possible to make it difficult to restrict the execution of a special effect such as a continuous notification effect.

(7) The fluctuation time (5 minutes) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown in FIG. 12 (B) is longer than the fluctuation time at the time of the second special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown in FIGS. 13 and 14. Therefore, even though a special effect such as the hold continuous notification effect regarding the second variable display is executed, the big hit game state is set based on the first variable display before the small hit game state based on the second variable display. It can be prevented from being controlled.

(8) As shown in step 155FS521A of FIG. 37, when there is hold storage information that is a big hit display result in the first hold storage information, a specific state such as a small hit game state is set based on the second variable display. When controlled, the execution of a special effect such as the hold continuous notification effect is restricted (prohibited) in the specific state, so that the effect is not intended even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed. It is possible to further reduce the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player based on the first variable display, and it is possible to improve the fun of the production by the special production.

(9) Further, when the step 155FS521 of FIG. 36 is controlled to a specific state such as a small hit game state based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, the hold continuous notification effect in the specific state. It is possible to execute the control that restricts (prohibits) the execution of the special effect such as, and the fluctuation time (5 minutes) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown in FIG. 12 (B) is shown in FIGS. 13 and 14. By setting it to be longer than the fluctuation time at the time of the second special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown, the second variable display is performed even though the special effect such as the hold continuous notification effect regarding the second variable display is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being controlled to the big hit game state based on the first variable display before the small hit game state based on the above. As a result, the fun of the special production can be further improved.

In this embodiment, "when the first variable display is controlled to a specific state based on the second variable display during execution of the first variable display, the first variable display is specified after the variable display is interrupted. As an embodiment corresponding to the "interruption means for resuming the interrupted first variable display after the end of the state", the first variable display being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed as a display result, and the first variable display is displayed. Is terminated, and when the first reserved storage number is not 0 after the end of the specific state based on the second variable display, the variable display is interrupted / restarted by starting the next first variable display. The variable display itself of the variable display is continued, the subtraction process of the first variable time timer (step S1121A in FIG. 23) is not performed, and the stop display of the display result based on the timeout of the first variable time timer is not performed. The subtraction process of the first variable time timer is restarted after the end of the specific state based on the second variable display, and the first variable is performed until the first variable time timer times out due to the restarted subtraction process of the first variable time timer. The variable display may be interrupted / resumed by executing the variable display of the display. That is, if the specific state based on the first variable display is not controlled during the period of the specific state based on the second variable display, even if the first variable display being executed is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed as the display result. Alternatively, although the subtraction process of the first variable time timer is interrupted, the first variable display may be apparently continued.

[Other examples of hold continuous notification production in a specific state]
Next, other examples of the above-mentioned specific state and hold continuous notification effect will be described. In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the hold continuous notification effect to be executed in a specific state, an example in which the hold continuous notification effect is executed for the hold storage information that is a small hit in the small hit game state is specified in favor of the player. As a state, the hold continuous notification effect in the small hit game state was explained. Hereinafter, other examples of the hold continuous notification effect in such a specific state will be described.

(1) When the small hit game state as a specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, the hold sequence for the hold storage information that becomes the big hit in the small hit game state. You may control to execute the notification effect.

When such a hold continuous notification effect is executed, when the small hit game state as a specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, the small hit game state is small. Regarding the hold ream notification effect that targets the hold storage information that is a big hit in the small hit game state, the limit control of the hold ream similar to the control that limits the execution of the hold storage information that becomes a hit and the target hold ream notification effect May be applied.

(2) When the big hit game state as a specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, the hold continuous notification targeting the hold storage information that becomes a small hit in the big hit game state. You may control to execute the effect.

When such a hold continuous notification effect is executed, when the big hit game state as a specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, a small hit is generated in the big hit game state. The same hold ream restriction control as the control for restricting the execution of the hold ream notification effect, which is the target, is applied to the hold ream notification effect targeting the hold storage information that becomes a small hit in the big hit game state. You may.

(3) When the jackpot game state as a specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, the hold continuous notification effect targeting the hold memory information that becomes the jackpot in the jackpot game state. You may control to execute.

When such a hold continuous notification effect is executed, when the jackpot gaming state as a specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, a jackpot is obtained in the jackpot gaming state. Even if the hold ream restriction control similar to the control for restricting the execution of the hold ream information and the target hold ream notification effect is applied to the hold ream notification effect targeting the hold storage information that becomes a big hit in the jackpot game state. Good.

(4) Further, the fluctuation time (5 minutes) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown in FIG. 12B is calculated from the fluctuation time at the time of the second special symbol jackpot at the time of KT shown at FIGS. 13 and 14. The control set for a long time may be applied to the gaming machine that controls each of the effects (1) to (3).

[Other variants]
Next, modification examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.

(1) In FIG. 34 and the like, when the hold continuous notification effect is not executed in the small hit game state, a display directly indicating the number of prize balls acquired, such as "+15", is displayed, and the hold continuous notification effect is displayed in the small hit game state. An example of displaying a display suggesting the acquisition of a prize ball such as "GET" is shown when executing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "GET" is used when executing the hold continuous notification effect in the small hit game state. By displaying a display other than the above, the player may perform an effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize that the effect is a hold continuous notification effect.

(2) When executing the hold continuous notification effect in the small hit game state as shown in FIG. 34, not only the suggestion of the acquisition of prize balls such as "GET" but also the number of prize balls acquired such as "GET15". May be displayed to suggest. In that case, the display of "GET" and the display of "15" may be displayed separately in different display areas. Further, when executing the hold continuous notification effect in the small hit game state as shown in FIG. 34, not only the suggestion of the acquisition of the prize ball such as "GET" but also the number of the prize balls acquired such as "GET15" is obtained. A suggestable display may be used.

(3) As shown in FIG. 17, the effect control command (symbol designation command, variation type designation command), the first valid start prize designation command, or the second valid start prize designation command, which is used for pre-reading the hold storage information and is output at the time of the start prize. By being output along with the valid start prize designation command, it is shown whether the command corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the command is not limited to this, for example, the symbol designation command and It may be possible to specify whether the command corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the data of the upper byte or the data of the lower byte of the variation type specification command.

(4) As a small hit display result, identification information dedicated to small hits such as a specific character, a specific character, or a specific figure other than the number symbol used for the normal variable display as shown in FIG. (Design) may be derived and displayed.

(5) As shown in FIG. 35 and the like, the hold continuous notification effect shows an example of selecting whether or not to execute by lottery when the second hold storage information includes hold storage information that is a small hit. Not limited to this, when the second reserved storage information includes the reserved storage information that is a small hit, it may be executed at a rate of 100%.

(6) As shown in FIGS. 36 (B), 37 (B), etc., the hold continuous notification effect is shown as an example of being executed as a small hit opening effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit end effect is not limited to this. May be executed as.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the hold continuous notification effect is divided into two program processes as shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, but the hold continuous notification effect is executed by one program process. You may do it.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the hold continuous notification effect is executed in the process related to the small hit effect, but it is executed in the prize ball number display process (S707) of FIG. You may.

(9) Further, in each of the above embodiments, when a plurality of big hits are consecutive (so-called consecutive villas), the result display displayed at the end of the consecutive villas shows the number of prize balls acquired during the big hits. The number of prize balls acquired only in the second KT state and the total number of acquired balls may be displayed separately on the screen. As a result, it is possible to recognize how many game balls have been acquired in which game state.

(10) Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a main display device and a sub display device may be provided, and the prize ball display process may be executed on either or both display devices.

(11) Further, in each of the above embodiments, when there are more prize balls than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one small hit game state that is normally assumed, the display mode and sound mode of the effect May be changed. For example, if there are 30 prize balls with 2 prizes in the special prize opening in one small hit, when there are 3 or more prizes in the special prize opening, the effect is different from the usual one. It may be a display mode or a sound mode.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 200 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 200 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. before reaching the reach (so-called when the reach is not reached). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 200 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 200 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

(13) Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are only those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. Not limited to this, the concept includes those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

(14) Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (effect symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. However, the variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

(15) Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. The circuit to be controlled may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

(16) Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 is another substrate ( For example, a sound / lamp having a function of a circuit mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the audio output board 70 shown in FIG. 5 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control board (board) and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. A microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control in response to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. You may send it to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

(17) Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and the player responds to the operation of the operation lever. When multiple types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It can also be applied to machines.

(18) Further, in each of the above embodiments, an example is obtained in which a game medium is used as a game machine, but the game machine according to the present invention is limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes. However, it can also be applied to an enclosed game machine in which a game medium such as a game ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

(19) Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and a gaming machine controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed based on the determination that the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot. However, it is not limited to such a game machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in a special variable winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also performs variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative symbols, background symbols, etc.) to a specific state (small hit gaming state, big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. A controllable gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.), the first variable display means (first special symbol display) that performs the first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, etc.) and derives and displays the display result. 8a, etc.), the second variable display means (second special symbol display 8b, etc.) that performs the second variable display (variable display of the second special symbol, etc.) and derives and displays the display result, and the above-mentioned that has not been started yet. The first reserved storage means (RAM 55, the first reserved storage buffer of FIG. 20, etc.) that stores the information related to the first variable display as the first reserved storage information, and the information related to the second variable display that has not been started yet are second. It is determined whether or not the second reserved storage means (RAM 55, the second reserved storage buffer of FIG. 20, etc.) stored as the reserved storage information and the second variable display which has not been started are controlled to the specific state. A look-ahead determination means (microcomputer 200 for effect control, step 155FS520 in FIG. 36, etc.) is provided, and the first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (S26A, S26B in FIG. 8). Etc.), when the specific state is controlled based on the second variable display during the execution of the first variable display, after the variable display is interrupted and the specific state ends, after the variable display is interrupted. , The interrupting means (game control microcomputer 560, steps 155FS314 to 155FS316, etc. in FIG. 18) that enables the interrupted first variable display to be resumed, and the specific state is controlled based on the second variable display. At that time, a special effect (holding continuous notification effect) can be executed based on the determination that the second variable display, which has not yet been started by the look-ahead determination means, is controlled to the specific state (FIG. 34). While the special effect executing means (microcomputer 200 for effect control, step 155FS534 in FIG. 36, etc.) and the first variable display (Y, etc. in step 155FS521 in FIG. 36) are being executed (c), etc.), the second When the specific state is controlled based on the variable display, the execution of the special effect is restricted in the specific state (not executed as shown in FIG. 36, etc.) Special effect limiting means (microcomputer 200 for effect control, FIG. 36). Step 155FS521 and the like), and further, a gaming medium (for example, A game ball) is provided in a game area (for example, right game area 96SG002R) where it can flow down, and from a non-predetermined state (for example, a closed state) to the non-predetermined state based on a variable display result of ordinary identification information (for example, a normal symbol). An ordinary variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 96SG006B) that can be changed to a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter, and a variable winning ball device 96SG006B provided in the game area based on the display result of the variable display. A special variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 96SG007) capable of changing from a non-easy state (for example, a closed state) to an easy state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state, and the above-mentioned ordinary state. A special state in which the variable device changes to the predetermined state more frequently than the non-special state (for example, a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state) and an advantageous state in which the special variable device changes to the easy state (for example, For example, a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 51) that can be controlled as a big hit game state) is provided, and the game control means controls the advantageous state. When it is in the non-special state (for example, a portion where the time saving control is not executed during the big hit game of any big hit type), the upstream position of the special variable device in the game area is usually identified by the entry of the game medium. A special area is provided in which the variable display of information becomes feasible and the entered game medium is discharged outside the game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-1, in the right game area 96SG002R, a special area is provided. A game machine (a part in which the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is provided at an upstream position of the variable winning ball device 96SG007) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of an unintended advantageous state for the player based on the first variable display even though the special effect related to the second variable display is executed. , It is possible to improve the fun of the special production. In addition, the increase in gambling can be suppressed.

In addition, the special variable winning ball device (special variable device) in which the special area is provided at the upstream position is easy for the game medium to enter when the specific state is favorable to the player based on the display result of the first variable display means. It is common to the case where the state (easy state) is set and the case where the game medium is easily entered (easy state) when the specific state is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the second variable display means. It may be a special variable winning ball device (special variable device), or a separate special variable winning ball device (special variable device). Then, in the case of a separate special variable winning ball device (special variable device), if the special region is provided at one of the upstream positions, the special region is provided at the other upstream position. It can be the object of the present invention even if it is not in a positional relationship.
Further, the number of prize balls paid out when the game medium enters the special area is set to 2 in the explanation related to FIG. 54-4 described later, but the game medium that has entered the special area is discharged to the outside of the game area. If it is configured to (do not return to the game area), the number of prize balls paid out by the approach may be a number other than 2 balls, or 0 balls (by the entry of the game medium). Normally, the variable display of the identification information becomes feasible, but the prize balls are not paid out).

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can improve the fun of the production by the special production and suppress the increase in gambling, the variable display of the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and the special identification A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of performing variable display of information (for example, a special symbol), and a gaming area (for example, a right gaming area 96SG002R) on which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can flow down. ), And can be changed from a non-predetermined state (for example, a closed state) to a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-predetermined state based on the variable display result of the ordinary identification information. A device (for example, a variable winning ball device 96SG006B) and a game medium provided in the game area are easier to enter from a non-easy state (for example, a closed state) than in the non-easy state based on a variable display result of special identification information. A special variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 96SG007) capable of changing to an easy state (for example, an open state) and a special state (for example, a special state) in which the normal variable device changes to the predetermined state more frequently than the non-special state. , High-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) and a game control means (for example, CPU 90103 is shown in FIG. The game control means is set to the non-special state when the game control means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, during a big hit game of any big hit type). In the upstream position of the special variable device in the game area), the variable display of the normal identification information can be executed by the entry of the game medium, and the entered game medium is moved out of the game area. A special area to be discharged is provided (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-1, in the right game area 96SG002R, a portion where the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is provided at an upstream position of the special variable winning ball device 96SG007. ) Game machines can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 47 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 47, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 905 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 905.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 905, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 905, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 902, a first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 9025A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 9025B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 905, a winning ball device 906A and a variable winning ball device 906B are provided.

The winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 906B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 9081 (see FIG. 48). The variable winning ball device 906B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 906A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 906B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 9081 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 906B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 47, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 9010 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 9010, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 906A and the variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 48), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 9010.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 9010 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 47, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 905, a passage gate 9041 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 9041, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 for game effects are provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (not shown in FIG. 47), a movable body 9032 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 9030 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 9031A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area. The stick controller 9031A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 9031A is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035A (see FIG. 48).

A push button 9031B is provided at a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. The operation on the push button 9031B is detected by the push sensor 9035B (see FIG. 48).

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a stick controller 9031A and a push button 9031B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 9030 included in the pachinko game machine 901 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 9041, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passage gate 9041 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 906B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 906A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 906B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than in the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 901, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "big hit", returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed) of the pachinko game machine 901. It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 905. In addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R and / or the game effect lamp 909 It may be performed by turning off the points, etc., and operating the movable body 9032.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 901, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is set according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 901 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 905, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with, for example, a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 9015, and the like as shown in FIG. 48. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 901 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 9011 includes a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103. , A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

The CPU 90103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 9011) by executing the program stored in the ROM 90101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 90101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 90 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 90102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 901. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 90101 may be expanded into the RAM 90102 and executed on the RAM 90102.

The random number circuit 90104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 90103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 90105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, ordinary symbol display 9020, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 9025A, the second hold display 9025B, the normal figure hold display 9025C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 90110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 9021, start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), count switch 9023). (Detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 9081 or the solenoid 9082) from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 9082 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

The main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 9012. The effect control command output from the main board 9011 is relayed by the relay board 9015 and supplied to the effect control board 9012. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 9011 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 9032, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 9012 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123, a random number circuit 90124, and an I / O 90125.

The effect control CPU 90120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 90123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 90121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 9012, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 90121 are used, and the RAM 90 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A or the push sensor 9035B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and a signal indicating the operation content as appropriate). It may also instruct the control unit 90123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120.

The display control unit 90123 supplies the image display device 905 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, thereby displaying the effect image on the image display device 905. The display control unit 90123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 9013 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 90123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 9032 to the movable body 9032 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 9032.

The voice control board 9013 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 908L and 908R, drives the speakers 908L and 908R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 908L and 908R. Let me.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 90123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 90120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 9032 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 9032, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 90124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 9011. It is configured to include the output port of.

Substrate other than the main board 9011 such as the effect control board 9012, the voice control board 9013, and the lamp control board 9014 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 901, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 9011)
First, the main operations on the main board 9011 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 90103. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 90103 on the main board 9011.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 90103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 90102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 90100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 90103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 9012 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 905 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 90102, a data protection processing of the RAM 90102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 90103 checks the backed up data data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S905). In step S905, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 90102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped by the parity bit or the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 9011 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 90103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 90102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 9012 (step S907). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives an effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 905 notifies, for example, that the image display device 905 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 90120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012, the CPU 90103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 50 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 90103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 90103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 9041). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 906B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 9020, and the normal figure hold display 9025C is turned on to display the normal figure hold number.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 90103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 90103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 50 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is made to the effect control board 9012. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 50 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S901 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 9012 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 90101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 9011 and various decisions on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control board 9012, various tables are stored in the ROM 90121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are used to make settings for changing the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 9012)
Next, the main operations of the effect control board 9012 will be described. When the effect control board 9012 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 52 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071) to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 9012. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S9072). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 9032, such as control for driving the movable body 9032 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S9073). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9073; No), the process of step S9073 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but interrupts when using a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S9073 (step S9073; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9074), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9075). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or stored in the RAM 90122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 90123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S9075, the effect control process process is executed (step S9076). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 9032. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011.

Following the effect control process process in step S9076, the effect random number update process is executed (step S9077), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 9012 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S9073. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S9073.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9076 of FIG. 52 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes the look-ahead advance notice setting process (step S90161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 9011. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of the variable display is received from the main board 9011. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 90123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 90123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 90123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 instructs the display control unit 90123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S90171 on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or, driving the movable body 9032, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 9011 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 9011. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 9011 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 9011 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 901 of the above basic explanation was a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 901 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.), the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature portion in this embodiment)
Next, the feature portion of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The left side of the image display device 905 in the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 901 is formed in the left game area 96SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 905 in the game board 902 is the game. It is formed in the right game area 96SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 96SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking handle 9030 flows down, and the right game area 96SG002R is a left game area 96SG002L by the operation of the ball operation handle 9030. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 96SG002C of the image display device 905 and flows down.

Further, two general winning openings 9010 are arranged in the left game area 96SG002L, and in the right game area 96SG002R, a passing gate 96SG041 and a variable winning ball device 96SG006B are provided from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 96SG002R. , The general drawing start winning opening 96SG042 and the special variable winning ball device 96SG007, in which the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied by winning the game ball, are arranged in order. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 96SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 9010 and the winning ball device 906A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 96SG006B, the large winning opening formed by the general drawing starting winning opening 96SG042 and the special variable winning ball device 96SG007, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 96SG041. There is. That is, the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R can first pass through the passing gate 96SG041, and then the second starting winning opening, the normal drawing starting winning opening 96SG042, and the large winning opening can be won in this order. There is.

The switch circuit 90110 in this embodiment includes a gate switch 9021 for detecting a game ball passing through the passing gate 96SG041 and a first starting port for detecting a game ball winning in the first starting winning opening. Switch 9022A, 2nd start port switch 9022B for detecting the game ball winning in the 2nd start winning opening, 1st count switch 96SG023A for detecting the game ball winning in the big winning opening, one of the general winnings The second count switch 96SG023B for detecting the game ball winning the mouth 9010, the third count switch 96SG023C for detecting the game ball winning the other general winning mouth 9010, and the game for winning the general drawing start winning mouth 96SG042. A normal start port switch 96SG023D for detecting a sphere is connected.

In addition, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 9010, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the general drawing starting winning opening 96SG042, and the large winning opening are each switch (first starting opening switch 9022A, second starting opening). After being detected by the switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023A, the second count switch 9023B, the third count switch 9023C, and the normal drawing start port switch 96SG03D), it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

As shown in FIG. 54-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 906A, the variable winning ball device 96SG006B, the normal drawing starting winning opening 96SG042, and the special variable winning ball device 96SG007. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 96SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening, the general drawing starting winning opening 96SG042, and the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R is the first. It is not possible to win a prize in the starting winning opening and the general winning opening 9010.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 96SG002R during the big hit game or the time saving state, the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R wins the second start. It is possible to win a prize in the mouth, the starting prize opening 96SG042, and the big winning opening. Further, during the big hit game, a part of the game balls flowing down the right game area 96SG002R wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 before winning the big winning opening, so that per round in the big hit game. It is possible to extend the period required for this.

Further, a plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 are arranged around the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 in the right game area 96SG002R. That is, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls to the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 during the big hit game is adjusted by these obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3, so that the period required for one round in the big hit game is appropriately adjusted. Is possible.

FIG. 54-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 54-2 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 54-2 (A), the command 8001H is the first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special diagram in the first special symbol display device 904A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. The command 81XXH is an effect that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-2 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit" and the variable display result are displayed. Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be the "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-2 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C05H is a sixth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is set as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening of the large winning opening, different EXT data correspond to, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. The second hold memory number notification command is used when, for example, a second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C3XXH is a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball in each winning opening. As shown in FIG. 54-4, when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening, which is the starting target of the first special symbol, four prize balls are paid out based on the winning and the number of prize balls is notified. As a command, C301H is output to the effect control board 9012. In addition, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning opening, which is the starting target of the second special symbol, one prize ball is paid out based on the winning, and C302H is used as a production control board as a command to notify the number of prize balls. It is designed to be output to 9012. In addition, when a game ball wins in the normal symbol start winning opening 96SG042, which is the starting target of the normal symbol, two prize balls are paid out based on the winning, and C303H is used as a production control board 9012 as a prize ball number notification command. Is designed to be output to.

Then, when a game ball wins in the large prize opening, 14 prize balls are paid out based on the prize, and C304H is output to the production control board 9012 as a prize ball number notification command. When a game ball wins in the general prize opening 9010, 5 prize balls are paid out based on the prize, and C305H is output to the production control board 9012 as a prize ball number notification command. ing.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. As will be described later, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is one ball as long as the number of balls having little influence on the number of winning balls associated with winning the big winning opening during the big hit game. It may be only 3 balls or more.

Returning to FIG. 54-2 (A), C400H is a gate passage notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 96SG041.

FIG. 54-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 9011. As shown in FIG. 54-3, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 9011, the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3'and the random number value MR4'for determining the display result of the general map are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random numbers MR1'to MR4'. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 96SG154 shown in FIG. 54-8, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1'to MR4' may be counted.

The random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. For example, it takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2'for determining the jackpot type has a jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random number value used to determine any of them, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random number value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to "1". It takes a value in the range of "997".

The random number value MR4'for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be used, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

FIG. 54-5 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "missing" and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... The normal reach fluctuation pattern may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

The fluctuation pattern in this embodiment includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" or the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C". PC1'-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 54-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. ing. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is the one. However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. from, rather than determining the variation pattern to run from fluctuation patterns belonging to the type that the determined, so as to determine using only random numbers MR3' for variation pattern determined without determining these types However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3'for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variation pattern types. after previously determined the type of variation pattern from the random number values, may be determined the variation pattern to run from fluctuation patterns belonging to the type that the determined.

FIG. 54-6 (A) shows a configuration example of a special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In this embodiment, the special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table in this embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1'for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1'for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the jackpot gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in this embodiment) (about 1/30 in this embodiment). ). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 54-7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 90101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment has a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". A table referenced to determine one. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variation is displayed (variable) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation" depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the symbol display device 904B. It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "big hit B" and "probability variable jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54-7 (B). In this embodiment, high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed as the jackpot type after the end of the jackpot game state. Probability change jackpot A and probability variation jackpot B that shift to the high accuracy high base state, and probability variation jackpot C that shifts to the high accuracy low base state where the high accuracy control is executed but the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state. And, after the end of the big hit game state, only the time saving control is executed and the non-probable variable big hit that shifts to the low probability high base state is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 is repeatedly executed 16 times (so-called 16 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 to the first state which is advantageous for the player. .. In addition, the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 to the first state which is advantageous for the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game by "probability variation jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and special in each round. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 96SG007 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed opening jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. The open period (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) is set. After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern (PC1'-1 shown in FIG. 54-5) is obtained when the fluctuation display result is "probability variation big hit C" and when it is "small hit". Since the variable display is executed and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 is the same, the probability variation control is executed for the player after the jackpot game and the small hit game of the probability variation jackpot C are completed. It is possible to continue the game while expecting it to be.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 54-7 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" are used depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. , "Probability variation jackpot C", and "Non-probability variation jackpot" are assigned different judgment values for the jackpot type. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the judgment value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 96SG006B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the winning ball is small. It is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 54-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change big hit A" with a large number of rounds, the variable special figure It is set so that the case where the figure is the second special figure is easier to determine than the case where the figure is the first special figure.

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the judgment value that is smaller than that when the variable special figure is the first special figure is the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

The RAM 90102 in this embodiment has a game control data holding area 96SG150 as shown in FIG. 54-8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Is provided. The game control data holding area 96SG150 shown in FIG. 54-8 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 96SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 96SG151B, a normal figure holding storage unit 96SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 96SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 96SG153, the game control counter setting unit 96SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 96SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 96SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 906A, and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 96SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1'for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2'for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3'for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment. Is stored as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 96SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 96SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 96SG006B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 96SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1'for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2'for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3'for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment. Is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 96SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 96SG151C contains the hold information of the normal figure game and the normal figure game hold information which has not been started by the normal symbol display 9020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 96SG041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. Although the game ball that has won the start winning opening 96SG042 is detected by the normal drawing start opening switch 96SG023D, the hold information of the normal drawing game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020 is stored. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 96SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through (wins) the passage gate 96SG041 and the normal figure start winning opening 96SG042, and the CPU 90103 uses the random number circuit 90104 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating a random number value MR4'for determining a normal map display result extracted from the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 96SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control flag setting unit 96SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 96SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 96SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 96SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control counter setting unit 96SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 96SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 90103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 96SG154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 90104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR2'to MR4' are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 90103. Therefore, the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 96SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 96SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

FIG. 54-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9026 shown in FIG. 50 as the normal symbol process process. In this normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes the normal symbol start winning determination process (96SGS300).

After executing the normal symbol start winning process, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of 96SGS301 to 96SGS307 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 96SG152.

In the normal symbol start winning process of the 96SGS300, as shown in FIG. 54-10, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the gate switch 9021 is on based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 provided in the passing gate 96SG041. (96SGS311). If the gate switch 9021 is on (96SGS311; Y), is the number of reserved storages in the normal figure set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) with reference to the reserved storage unit 96SG151C? It is determined whether or not (96SGS312). When the number of reserved memory in the normal figure is not the upper limit value (96SGS312; N), the gate passage flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 96SG041 is set and the process proceeds to 96SGS317 (96SGS313).

When the gate switch 9021 is off in 96SGS311 (96SGS311; N) or when the number of reserved storages in 96SGS312 is the upper limit (96SGS312), whether or not the start port switch 96SG024 is on is determined. Judgment (96SGS314). If the normal figure start port switch 96SG024 is on (96SGS314; Y), the normal figure hold storage number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) with reference to the normal figure hold storage unit 96SG151C. It is determined whether or not it is (96SGS315). When the number of reserved memory of the normal figure is not the upper limit (96SGS315; N), the normal figure start opening winning flag indicating that the game ball has won the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is set and the process proceeds to 96SGS317 (96SGS316).

When the normal figure start port switch 96SG024 is off (96SGS314; N) or when the normal figure hold storage number is the upper limit value (96SGS315; Y), the normal symbol start winning process is terminated.

In the 96SGS317, the CPU 90103 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4'for determining the normal figure display result from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 96SG154 (96SGS317). .. The numerical data extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of a free entry in the normal figure hold storage unit 96SG151C (96SGS318).

Then, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the normal drawing start opening winning flag is set (96SGS319). When the normal figure start opening winning flag is set (96SGS319; Y), the normal figure starting opening winning flag is cleared (96SGS320), and the number of prize balls notification command according to the winning of the normal drawing start winning opening is commanded. (C303H) is set to transmit, and the normal symbol start winning process is completed (96SGS321).

Further, when the normal figure start winning flag is not set (96SGS319; N), it is further determined whether or not the gate passage flag is set (96SGS322). When the gate passage flag is not set (96SGS322; N), the normal symbol start winning process is completed, and when the gate passage flag is set (96SGS322; Y), the gate passage flag is cleared and ( 96SGS323), the transmission setting of the gate passage notification command is set, and the normal symbol start winning process is completed (96SGS324).

The prize ball number notification command set to be transmitted in the process of 96SGS321 and the gate passage notification command set to be transmitted in the process of 96SGS324 are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by the CPU 90103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 50). It is output (transmitted) to it. As described above, in the normal symbol start winning process in this embodiment, different commands are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 depending on whether the game ball has passed through the passage gate 96SG041 or the normal symbol start winning opening 96SG042. It is designed to do.

As shown in FIG. 54-9, the normal symbol normal processing of S96SGS301 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 96SG151C. Further, in the normal symbol normal processing, the fluctuation display result derives and displays whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is "hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4'for determining the normal symbol display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before it is done. Further, in the normal symbol normal processing, a fixed normal symbol (either a hit symbol or a missed symbol) in the normal symbol game is set by the normal symbol display 9020 in accordance with the variation display result of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. .. In the normal symbol normal processing, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variation display result of the normal symbol is determined in advance.

The normal symbol variation pattern setting process of 96SGS302 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "1". This normal symbol variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol to one of a plurality of types based on whether or not the game state is a time saving state. When the normal symbol variation pattern setting process is executed and the normal symbol variation display is started, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "2". For example, in this embodiment, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), the normal symbol variation pattern (variation time of the normal symbol) is determined to be 1 second, and the game is played. When the state is a non-time saving state (low accuracy low base state or high accuracy low base state), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (normal symbol fluctuation time) may be determined for a longer period than the time saving state such as 3 minutes. ..

The normal symbol variation processing of 96SGS303 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "2". This normal symbol variation process includes a process of setting the normal symbol display 9020 to change the normal symbol, a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the like. .. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol reaches the normal symbol fluctuation time, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The normal symbol stop processing of 96SGS304 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "3". This normal symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020 and setting to stop display (derive) the confirmed normal symbol that is the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. ing. Then, it is determined whether or not the hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 96SG152 is on, and if the hit flag is on, the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to "4". Will be done. On the other hand, when the hit flag is off, the value of the normal map process flag is updated to "0".

The pre-opening process per normal symbol of 96SGS305 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "4". In this pre-opening process for hitting the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is set to the open state (opening control is executed) based on the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is "hit" or the game state. It includes processing to make settings. For example, when the gaming state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), the opening period of the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is determined to be 3 seconds, and the gaming state is a non-time saving state (low accuracy). In the low base state or high accuracy low base state), the opening period of the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is 0.1 seconds, etc., which is a period during which it is more difficult for the game ball to win the second starting winning opening than in the short time state. It should be set to.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the case where the gaming state is in the non-time saving state, and the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is used for a long period of time. The opening makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game state is the time saving state, the game state is the non-time saving state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened than in the case of By executing at least one such as increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is opened, it is sufficient to make it easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning opening than in the non-time saving state.

The processing during opening per normal symbol of 96SGS306 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “5”. Whether or not it is time to return the variable winning ball device 96SG006B from the open state to the closed state based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the variable winning ball device 96SG006B in the processing during opening per normal symbol. It includes processing to determine whether or not. Then, when the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is returned to the closed state, the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9081.

The post-opening process per normal symbol of 96SGS307 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “6”. This post-opening process for hitting a normal symbol includes a process for determining whether or not the number of times the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is opened has reached the maximum number of times the variable winning device is opened. When the maximum number of times the variable winning device is opened is not reached, the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of times the variable winning device is opened is not reached, the value of the normal figure process flag is " It is updated to 0 ”.

Next, the operation mode of the effect control CPU 90120 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54-11 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control process processing in this embodiment. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the pre-reading advance notice setting process (S90161) described above, and then performs a left-handed notification effect execution process (96SGS162) for executing the left-handed notification effect described later, and later described. The normal drawing start opening winning effect processing (96SGS163) for executing the general drawing start opening winning effect and the prize ball number display processing (96SGS164) for displaying the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game on the image display device 905. To execute. Then, any of the processes S90170 to S90177 is executed.

FIG. 54-12 is a flowchart of the left-handed notification effect execution process shown in FIG. 54-11. In the left-handed notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the left-handed notification effect process timer is operating (96SGS331). When the left-handed notification effect process timer is not operating (96SGS331; N), whether or not the gate passage notification command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the gate passage notification command is received from the main board 9011. Is determined (96SGS332). The gate passage notification command reception flag is a flag set when it is determined in the command analysis process (see FIG. 52) that the effect control CPU 90120 has received the gate passage notification command.

When the gate passage notification command reception flag is set (96SGS332; Y), the gate passage notification command reception flag is cleared and the process proceeds to 96SGS337 (96SGS333), and when the gate passage notification command reception flag is not set (96SGS332). ; N), and further, it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (96SGS334). The prize ball number notification command reception flag is a flag set when it is determined in the command analysis process (see FIG. 52) that the effect control CPU 90120 has received the prize ball number notification command.

When the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (96SGS334; N), the left-handed notification effect execution process is terminated, and when the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (96SGS334; Y), the effect control The CPU 90120 specifies the number of prize balls from the received prize ball number notification command (96SGS335), and the specified number of prize balls is two, that is, the prize balls correspond to the winning of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042. It is determined whether or not the ball is a prize ball (96SGS336). When the number of specified prize balls is other than 2 (96SGS336; N), that is, the prize ball is one of the general winning opening 9010, the large winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening. If the prize ball corresponds to the winning of the prize, the left-handed notification effect execution process is terminated. If the specified number of prize balls is two (96SGS336; Y), the process proceeds to 96SGS337.

In the 96SGS337, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the value of the effect process flag is any of "4" to "7", that is, whether or not the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. When the value of the effect process flag is any of "4" to "7" (96SGS337; N), the left-handed notification effect execution process is terminated, and the value of the effect process flag is "0" to "3". In either case (96SGS337; Y), the gaming state is specified (96SGS338). The game state may be specified from the received game state designation command or the like.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the specified game state is a low-probability low-base state, that is, whether or not the game state is a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the left game area 96SG002L (96SGS339). .. When the specified game state is a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state (96SGS339; N) in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area 96SG002R, the left-handed notification effect execution process is terminated and the specified game is executed. When the state is a low accuracy low base state, after reading and setting the process table (left-handed notification effect process table) corresponding to the left-handed notification effect (96SGS340), the process data of the selected left-handed notification effect process table. The left-handed notification effect process timer in 1 is started (96SGS341). In this embodiment, the left-handed notification effect process table corresponding to the left-handed notification effect is stored in the ROM 90121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 is subjected to an effect device (effect component) according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set left-handed notification effect process table. The control of the image display device 905, the game effect lamp 909 as the effect component, and the speakers 908L, 908R, etc. as the effect component) is started to end the left-handed notification effect execution process (96SGS342).

When the left-handed notification effect process timer is operating in 96SGS331 (96SGS331; Y), the value of the left-handed notification effect process timer is set to -1 (96SGS343), and the left-handed notification effect process timer is timered out. It is determined whether or not it has been done (96SGS344). When the left-handed notification effect process timer is not timer-out (96SGS344; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the left-handed notification effect process timer to end the left-handed notification effect execution process ( In the case of 96SGS349), when the left-handed notification effect process timer is timer-out (96SGS344; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the last left-handed notification effect process timer that is further timered out (96SGS345).

If it is not the last left-handed notification effect process timer (96SGS345; N) that the timer is out, the process data of the left-handed notification effect is switched (96SGS346). That is, the left-handed notification effect process timer is started again by setting the next set left-handed notification effect process timer setting value in the left-handed notification effect process timer in the left-handed notification effect process timer (96SGS347). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed according to the content of the process data set next (96SGS348), and the left-handed notification effect execution process is terminated.

If the last left-handed notification effect process timer matches the timer in 96SGS345 (96SGS345; Y), the left-handed notification effect is ended and the left-handed notification effect execution process is ended (96SGS350).

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball is driven into the right game area 96SG002R when the game state is in the low probability low base state, and the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041 or the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042. The left-handed notification effect is executed based on the winning of the prize, and it is possible to urge the player to launch the game ball toward the left game area 96SG002L.

FIG. 54-13 is a flowchart of the normal drawing start opening winning effect processing shown in FIG. 54-11. In the normal drawing start opening winning effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the value of the effect process flag is "6", that is, whether or not the effect process during the jackpot is being executed (96SGS351). ). When the value of the effect process flag is other than "6" (96SGS351; N), the normal drawing start opening winning effect process is completed, and when the value of the effect process flag is "6" (96SGS351; Y), Further, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot or a probability variation jackpot C (96SGS352).

When the jackpot type is non-probability change jackpot or probability variation jackpot C (96SGS352; Y), the normal figure start opening winning effect processing is completed, and when the jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (96SGS352; N). , Whether or not the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set according to the winning of the prize ball start winning opening, that is, the prize ball number notification command reception flag indicating that the number of prize balls is 2 is set. It is determined whether or not (96SGS353).

When the prize ball number notification command reception flag corresponding to the winning of the normal drawing start winning opening is set (96SGS353; Y), the effect control CPU 90120 is a process table corresponding to the normal drawing starting opening winning effect (general figure). After reading and setting the start opening winning effect process table) (96SGS354), the normal figure start opening winning effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (96SGS355). In this embodiment, the process table corresponding to the normal drawing start opening winning effect is stored in the ROM 90121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 is directed by the effect device (effect) according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set normal drawing start opening winning effect process table. The control of the image display device 5 as a visual component, the game effect lamp 909 as a directing component, and the speakers 908L, 908R as a directing component) is started, and the normal drawing start opening winning effect processing is completed (96SGS356). As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in 96SGS352 to 96SGS356, it is possible to execute the normal figure start opening winning effect only during the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B. Further, in the embodiment of this embodiment, both the passing gate 96SG041 and the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 satisfy the starting condition of the normal symbol when the game ball passes (winning), which is shown in the process of 96SGS353. As described above, when the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SGS042, the normal drawing starting opening winning effect is executed, but when the game ball enters the passing gate 96SG041, the normal drawing starting opening winning effect is not executed. It has become like.

When the prize ball number notification command reception flag corresponding to the winning of the normal drawing start opening winning effect is not set in 96SGS353 (96SGS353; N), the effect control CPU 90120 is the normal drawing starting opening winning effect effect process timer. Determines whether or not is in operation (96SGS357). When the normal figure start opening winning effect process timer is not operating (96SGS357; N), the normal drawing start opening winning effect processing is finished, and when the normal drawing start opening winning effect process timer is operating (96SGS357; Y). , The value of the normal figure start opening winning effect process timer is decremented by -1 (96SGS358), and it is determined whether or not the normal figure start opening winning effect process timer has timed out (96SGS359).

When the normal figure start opening winning effect process timer is not timer-out (96SGS359; N), the normal figure start opening opening winning effect process timer controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the value of the normal figure start opening winning effect process timer to start the normal figure. The oral prize production process is completed (96SGS364). Further, when the normal figure start opening winning effect process timer is timer-out (96SGS359; Y), is the timer-out normal drawing start opening winning effect process timer the last normal figure start opening winning effect process timer? It is determined whether or not (96SGS360).

If the timer is not the last normal figure start opening winning effect process timer (96SGS360; N), the normal figure start opening winning effect process data is switched. (96SGS361). That is, by setting the next set value of the Fuzu start opening winning effect process timer in the Fuzu start opening winning effect process timer to the Fuzu start opening winning effect process timer, the Fuzu start opening winning effect process timer can be set. Start again (96SGS362). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the next set normal figure start opening winning effect process data (96SGS363), and the general drawing start opening winning effect process is terminated.

If the timer-out of the 96SGS360 is the last Fuzu start opening winning effect process timer (96SGS360; Y), the Fuzu start opening winning effect is finished and the Fuzu start port is started. The winning production process is completed (96SGS365).

As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R toward the big winning opening during the big hit game may win a prize in the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, and during the big hit game. When the game ball wins the Fuzu start winning opening 96SG042, the Fuzu starting opening winning effect is executed based on the winning. For this reason, the player wins the Fuzu start winning opening 96SG042 before a part of the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R wins the big winning opening by perceiving the Fuzu starting opening winning effect. It is possible to recognize what has been done.

FIG. 54-14 is a flowchart of the prize ball number display process shown in FIG. 54-11. In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the values of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball counter are being displayed on the image display device 905 (96SGS371). The first prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out in all the big hits in the consecutive villas, and the second prize ball counter is paid during one big hit game. It is a counter for counting the number of prize balls issued.

When the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter are not being displayed on the image display device 905 (96SGS371; N), whether or not the value of the effect process flag is "6", that is, , It is determined whether or not the production during the big hit is being executed (96SGS372). When the jackpot production is being executed (big hit game is in progress) (96SGS372; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot game is non-probability change jackpot or probability variation jackpot C (96SGS373). When the jackpot type of the jackpot game is non-probability change jackpot or probability variation jackpot C (96SGS373; Y), the prize ball number display processing is completed, and the jackpot type of the jackpot game is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B. (96SGS373; N) starts displaying the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter on the image display device 905, and ends the prize ball number display process (96SGS374).

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 is displaying the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter on the image display device 905 in 96SGS371 (96SGS371; Y), the effect control process flag is displayed. It is determined whether or not the value is "7", that is, whether or not the ending effect is being executed (96SGS375). When the value of the effect control process flag is other than "7" (96SGS375; N), it is further determined whether or not the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (96SGS376). When the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (96SGS376; N), the prize ball number display process is terminated, and when the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (96SGS376; Y), the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set. The number of prize balls is specified from the prize ball number notification command (96SGS377), and whether or not the specified number of prize balls is 5, that is, whether or not the prize balls correspond to the prizes in the general prize opening. Judgment (96SGS378).

When the specified number of prize balls is 5, that is, when the prize balls are paid out in response to the winning of the game balls in the general winning opening 9010 provided in the left game area 96SG002L (96SGS378; Y). ) Clears the prize ball number notification command reception flag (without adding the prize ball number of the 5 balls to the values of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter) and performs the prize ball number display process. Finish (96SGS381). When the specified number of prize balls is other than 5 (96SGS376; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter (96SGS379). ), The values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 905 are updated and displayed (96SGS380). Then, the prize ball number notification command reception flag is cleared to end the prize ball number display process (96SGS381). That is, in this embodiment, even if the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 9010 provided in the left game area 96SG002L during the jackpot game in which the right-handed ball is hit (the game ball is launched toward the right game area 96SG002R). The values of the prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter displayed on the image display device 905 are not updated and displayed.

When the value of the effect process flag is "7" in 96SGS375 (96SGS375; Y), is the image display device 905 displaying the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter? It is determined whether or not (96SGS382). If the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter are not being displayed on the image display device 905 (96SGS382; N), the prize ball number display process is completed and the first prize ball number display process is completed on the image display device 905. When the values of the prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter are being displayed (96SGS382; Y), the display of the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter on the image display device 905 ends. At the same time (96SGS383), the value of the second prize ball counter is reset to "0" to end the prize ball number display process (96SGS384).

When the value of the effect process flag is other than "6" in 96SGS372 (96SGS372; N), the effect control CPU 90120 specifies the game state (96SGS385), and the specified game state is in the low probability low base state. It is determined whether or not it is (96SGS386). When the specified gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state (96SGS386; N), the prize ball number display processing is completed, and the specified gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state (96SGS386). Y) further determines whether or not a value other than "0" is set in the first prize ball number counter (96SGS387). When "0" is set in the first prize ball counter (96SGS387; N), the prize ball number display process is terminated, and a value other than "0" is set in the first prize ball counter. In the case (96SGS387; Y), the value of the first prize ball number counter is reset to "0" to end the prize ball number display process (96SGS387).

As described above, during the big hit game in this embodiment, the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 905, and the payout is made in the big hit game in the consecutive villas. The number of prize balls awarded and the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game can be recognized by the player. Since the big hit game in this embodiment is digested by the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R winning the big prize opening, the game ball is placed in the general winning opening provided in the left game area 96SG002L. The number of prize balls paid out according to the winning is not reflected in the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 905 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54-15 and 54-16.

First, as shown in FIGS. 54-15 (A) and 54-15 (B), the variation display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B in the low probability low base state (the variation display result is the jackpot, and the variation display result is the jackpot. When the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot A or probabilistic jackpot B), the jackpot game is started. At this time, the image display device 905 displays the effect corresponding to the big hit game (the effect during the big hit), and at the lower part of the image display device 905, the value 96SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter. The display of the value 96SG005B of is started. The value of the first prize ball counter, 96SG005A, and the value of the second prize ball counter, 96SG005B, are added and updated each time the game ball wins a large prize opening or a general drawing start winning opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-15 (C), every time the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 during the big hit game, the character image 96SG005C is displayed as the normal drawing starting opening winning effect. In this embodiment, a mode in which the character image 96SG005C is displayed on the image display device 905 as a normal drawing start opening winning effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general drawing start As for the mouth winning effect, the player indicates that the player has won the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042, such as image display on the image display device 905, output of specific sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, and light emission of the game effect lamp 909. The form does not matter as long as it is a perceptible production.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 54-15 (D) to 54-15 (F), when the jackpot game is completed, the value of the first prize ball counter in the image display device 905 is 96SG005A and the second prize ball counter. The display of the value 96SG005B is completed, and the gaming state shifts to the high accuracy and high base state. When the fluctuation display result becomes the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B again in the high accuracy high base state, the image display device 905 again displays the value of the first prize ball counter value 96SG005A and the second prize ball counter. The value 96SG005B is displayed. However, the value 96SG005A of the first prize ball counter is inherited from the number of prize balls paid out in the previous big hit game, while the value 96SG005B of the second prize ball counter is reset to "0". To.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 54-16 (A) and 54-16 (B), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041 when the game state is in the low probability low base state, or when the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041 or the normal drawing start winning opening. If the player wins the 96SG042, that is, if the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 96SG002R in a low probability low base state in which the game ball should be launched toward the left game area 96SG002L, these game balls pass through the gate. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed 96SG041 and the game ball has won the winning opening 96SG042, a message image 96SG005D such as "Please return to left-handed" is displayed at the upper part of the image display device 905 as a left-handed notification effect. Will be done. In this embodiment, a mode in which the message image 96SG005D is displayed on the image display device 905 is illustrated as the left-handed notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left-handed notification effect is not limited to this. , Image display on the image display device 905, output of specific sounds from the speakers 908L and 908R, light emission of the game effect lamp 909, etc., can urge the player to launch the game ball toward the left game area 96SG002L. The form does not matter as long as it is a production. (Explanation of display monitor)
Further, as the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, a display monitor 96SG029 capable of displaying winning information (performance information) such as a base value may be provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 901 provided with the display monitor 96SG029 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54-17 to 54-22.

As shown in FIG. 54-17, a display monitor 96SG029 is arranged on the main board 9011, and the main board 9011 and the display monitor 96SG029 are housed in a board case 96SG201 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is arranged in the state. Since the substrate case 96SG201 in this embodiment is made of a transparent resin material or the like, the display of the display monitor 96SG029 can be visually recognized through the substrate case 96SG201.

Further, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko game machine 901, a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the game ball that has won a prize in each winning port or the game ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko game machine 901 is provided. In the nozzle, a discharge port switch 96SG025 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko game machine 901 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided.

As shown in FIG. 54-18, the caulking pin 96SG011B is attached to the substrate case 90201. By providing the caulking pin 96SG011B, the main board 9011 is completely enclosed in the board case 96SG201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 9011 are prevented. The substrate case 96SG201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

Further, a sealing sticker 96SG011S is attached to the substrate case 90201 to prove that the main substrate 9011 is sealed. The sealing seal 96SG011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 96SG201. The seal seal 96SG011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 9011, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 96SG029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 96SG029. As described above, the display monitor 96SG029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal seal 96SG011S.

The display monitor 96SG029 includes a first display unit 96SG029A, a second display unit 96SG029B, a third display unit 96SG029C, and a fourth display unit 96SG029D. The first display unit 96SG029A to the fourth display unit 96SG029D are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments.

On the display monitor 96SG029, the real-time base value shown in FIG. 54-19 (A) and the previous cumulative base value are displayed as performance information. The real-time base value of the item number "bL" is a base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60,000 out balls in the normal state (low accuracy low base state). More specifically, the real-time base value is the number of game balls fired in the normal state, and is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the game balls being measured up to 60,000 (0 to 59999). This is the value shown. The previous cumulative base value of the item number "b6" is a base value (cumulative value measured last time) for every 60,000 out balls in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is the number of game balls fired in the normal state, and is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the previously measured 60,000 game balls.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901 (CPU90103) in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54-19 (B), in order to calculate these real-time base values and the previous cumulative base values, the first general winning opening (CPU 90103) For example, the number of winning balls by winning a prize in the general winning opening 9010 provided with the second count switch 96SG023B, and the number of winning balls in the second general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 9010 provided with the third count switch 96SG023C). The number of prize balls by winning, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening, the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening, the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening, the number of game balls hit Each is tabulated. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the low accuracy and low base state is in the state, each value shown in FIG. 54-19 (B) is totaled, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated using these totaled values. -It is designed to be displayed.

When displaying the calculated real-time base value, as shown in FIG. 54-19 (C), the upper two digits of the display monitor 96SG029 (first display unit 96SG029A and second display unit 96SG029B) are real-time base. In addition to displaying (lighting) "bL." Indicating that, the lower two digits (third display unit 96SG029C and fourth display unit 96SG029D) indicate a numerical value (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or a real-time base. Display (lights up) "-" indicating that the value has not been calculated. Further, when displaying the calculated previous cumulative base value, as shown in FIG. 54-19 (C), the upper two digits of the display monitor 96SG029 (first display unit 96SG029A and second display unit 96SG029B) last time. In addition to displaying (lighting) "b6.", Which indicates that it is a cumulative base, numerical values (%) in the range of "00" to "99" in the lower two digits (third display unit 96SG029C and fourth display unit 96SG029D). ) Or "-" indicating that the previous cumulative base value has not been calculated is displayed (lit).

After the jackpot game of the non-probability change jackpot in this embodiment is completed, the probability variation control is executed but the time saving control is not executed. However, after the jackpot game of the non-probability variation jackpot is completed, the probability variation control and the time saving are executed. You may choose not to perform both controls. However, when the probability variation control and the time reduction control are not executed after the jackpot game of the non-probability variation jackpot is completed in this way, from the time when the game ball wins the big winning opening until it is detected by the first count switch 96SG023A Since a time lag occurs in the game, the game ball is detected by the first count switch 96SG023A after the big hit game is completed, so that the base value (real-time base value or the previous cumulative base value) in the normal state (low probability low base state) ) May not be calculated accurately.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54-20, the pachinko gaming machine 901 (CPU90103) in this embodiment has a non-probability variation among the game balls e, f, g launched in the final round of the non-probability variation jackpot jackpot game. When the final round of the big hit big hit game ends and the ending effect starts (the timing when the big winning door is closed), the ending effect ends from t4 and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state). In the period T4 up to the timing t6 controlled by, the period T5 (the length of the period T4) from the timing t4 to the latest timing t5 in which the game ball winning the large winning opening at the timing t4 can be detected by the outlet switch 96SG025. The game ball e detected by the outlet switch 96SG025 up to (the length of the period T5) is not counted as the out ball (number of hit balls) in the normal state (low accuracy and low base state) (performance display). By not including it in the calculation of), it is possible to calculate an accurate real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value.

Further, in this embodiment, the display monitor 96SG029 illustrates a mode in which the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 96SG029 , Other performance information such as the character ratio (role ratio) and the continuous character ratio (role ratio) in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be displayed, and if an error occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, It may be displayed that the error has occurred.

For example, when an error occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, as shown in FIG. 54-21 (A), the upper two digits of the display monitor 96SG029 are displayed by blinking "-" and the lower two digits are displayed. The occurrence of an error may be notified by displaying "-" on. Further, as a display mode of the display monitor 96SG029 when an error occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-21 (B), the display is not performed in the upper two digits, or the display is shown. As shown in 54-21 (C), a blinking display of "E" indicating an error is performed in the upper two digits, or as shown in FIG. 54-21 (D), an error (Err) is displayed in the upper two digits. ) May be flashed and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 (CPU90103) in this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the calculated real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are displayed on the display monitor 96SG029, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the display of these real-time base values and the previous cumulative base values may be arbitrarily switchable or may be switchable at a predetermined time. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 54-22 (A) to 54-22 (E), the display of the real-time base value and the display of the previous cumulative base value on the display monitor 96SG029 may be switched every 5 seconds.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the display monitor 96SG029 switches between the display indicating that the error has occurred, the real-time base value display, and the previous cumulative base value display every 5 seconds. As a result, the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value may be confirmed even when an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54-1, the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is provided at an upstream position of the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 in the right gaming area 96SG002R. Therefore, during the jackpot game, a part of the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 96SG002R wins the general prize start winning slot 96SG042 before winning the jackpot, so the period required for each round of the jackpot game Since it is possible to prolong the period (prolongation of the period required for the jackpot game), it is possible to prevent excessively high unhealthy playability such as an excessively large number of prize balls paid out in a short time. It is possible to suppress the increase in gambling. Furthermore, since a part of the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R during the big hit game wins the normal symbol start winning opening 96SG042, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed, so that the winning opportunity to the second starting winning opening Can also be increased.

In particular, the pachinko gaming machine 901 needs to satisfy the following criteria regarding the ball ejection rate in the test firing test regarding the ball ejection performance for realizing a sound game with suppressed gambling. The ball output rate is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out (the number of prize balls) to the number of game balls fired, and the game machine in which 100 balls per minute (6000 balls per hour) are fired. It is a premise.
1: The ball output rate in a short time (1 hour) is 33% to 220%
2: The ball output rate in medium time (4 hours) is 40% to 150%
3: The ball output rate for a long time (10 hours) is 50% to 133%.
In particular, in order to meet the criteria for the ball output rate in a short time, the board layout and special variable winning ball device that reduce the number of balls (number of prize balls) during the big hit game or lengthen the interval period between rounds. It is necessary to make 96SG007 a structure that easily spills balls. However, with these measures, there is a problem that the profit that the player can obtain (for example, the number of prize balls originally obtained in the big hit game) is reduced, so that the game interest is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, by providing the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 at the upstream position of the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 (large winning opening), a part of the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R during the big hit game. is but so as to win the Hiroshizu start winning opening 96SG042, achieving prolonged period required for the jackpot gaming without impairing the number prize balls capable player obtained during the jackpot gaming, a short time of payout rate I try to keep it within the range of 33% to 220%.

As a plan to prolong the period required for the big hit game, as described in this embodiment, except that the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is provided at the upstream position of the big winning opening, between the round games during the big hit game. It is conceivable to set a long interval (the period during which the big winning opening is closed) or to provide an out opening around the big winning opening, but if these plans are adopted, the period of the big hit game is unnecessarily. However, it is conceivable that the game interest will be reduced because the prize ball will not be paid out due to the game ball entering the out opening even though the big hit game is in progress. In addition, it is conceivable to provide a general winning opening 9010 instead of the general winning opening 96SG042 at an upstream position of the large winning opening, but if a game ball wins the general winning opening 9010, four or more balls based on the winning. It is necessary to pay out the prize ball. However, since there is no restriction on the number of winning balls for the starting winning opening (including the starting winning opening for satisfying the starting conditions of special symbols such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening), this implementation is carried out. By providing the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 at the upstream position of the big winning opening as in the form, the increase in the ball ejection rate in a short time is suppressed without reducing the number of balls and the number of difference balls during the big hit game. The increase in gambling can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, a variable winning ball device 96SG006B, a special variable winning ball device 96SG007, and a normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 are provided in the right game area 96SG002R. The variable winning ball device 96SG006B, the special variable winning ball device 96SG007, and the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 are located upstream of the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 and downstream of the variable winning ball device 96SG006B. If the start winning opening 96SG042 is provided, it may be provided in the left game area 96SG002L.

Further, since the passing gate 96SG041 is also provided at the upstream position of the normal figure start winning opening 96SG042 in the right game area 96SG002R, it is necessary to increase the chance that the normal symbol variation display is executed together with the normal drawing starting winning opening 96SG042. It is possible to suppress the increase in gambling and the decrease in game entertainment.

In this embodiment, a mode in which the passage gate 96SG041 is provided in the right game area 96SG002R is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the passage gate 96SG041 is not the right game area 96SG002R but the left. It may be provided in the game area 96SG002L, or may be provided in both the right game area 96SG002R and the left game area 96SG002L. Further, the position where the passage gate 96SG041 is provided in the right game area 96SG002R may be on the downstream side of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, and the passage gate 96SG041 is not provided in either the right game area 96SG002R or the left game area 96SG002L. It is also good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-1, the right game area 96SG002R is provided with the variable winning ball device 96SG006B at the downstream position of the passing gate 96SG041 and the upstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042. When the fluctuation display becomes "hit", the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R can win the second starting winning opening before winning the normal drawing starting winning opening 96SG042 or the large winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to increase the winning efficiency of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state, that is, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is provided at the downstream position of the passing gate 96SG041 and the upstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 in the right game area 96SG002R, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the position where the variable winning ball device 96SG006B is provided in the right game area 96SG002R may be an upstream position of the passing gate 96SG041 or a downstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-1, the right game area 96SG002R is provided with the variable winning ball device 96SG006B and the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042, while the left gaming area 96SG002L is provided with the general winning opening 9010 and the winning ball. Since the device 906A is provided, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the left game area 96SG002L from unreasonably executing the variable display of the second special symbol or the normal symbol. Further, since a plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK1 partitioning the right game area 96SG002R and the left game area 96SG002L are arranged between the winning ball device 906A and the special variable winning ball device 96SG007, the left game area 96SG002L flows down. With these obstacle nails 96SGK1, it is possible to make it impossible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening, the general drawing starting winning opening 96SG042, and the large winning opening.

In this embodiment, the embodiment in which the general winning opening 9010 is provided only in the left gaming area 96SG002L is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 9010 is provided in the right gaming area 96SG002R. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-4, among the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins each winning opening, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the large winning opening is the largest. Since the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the general prize opening 96SG042 is less than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the general prize opening 9010, the game ball starts the general prize. It is possible to prolong the period of the big hit game while suppressing the influence of the number of prize balls paid out when winning the mouth on the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls win each winning opening in the big hit game state. Therefore, the increase in gambling can be further suppressed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), the player launches the gaming ball toward the left gaming area 96SG002L to obtain the first starting winning opening. When the game state is a short time state (low base state) with the aim of winning a prize, the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 96SG002R to pass the game ball to the passage gate 96SG041 or a general drawing. It is a game that aims to win a prize in the start winning opening 96SG042, and further aims to win a prize in the second starting winning opening controlled in an open state based on a normal drawing. Then, in this embodiment, even if the game state is the normal state, the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 96SG002R to pass the game ball through the passing gate 96SG041 or the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042 (or By making it win), it is possible to generate a hit with a normal figure and control the second start winning opening to an open state.

However, when the game state is the normal state, even if the game ball passes (or wins) through the passing gate 96SG041 or the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, the normal drawing hit occurs as compared with the case where the time is shortened. The probability is extremely low (see Fig. 54-6 (B)), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the period during which the second start winning opening is controlled to the open state is short, and so on. 2 It is difficult to win a prize in the starting prize opening. Therefore, even if the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 96SG002R in the normal state, the winning of the second starting winning opening by launching the game ball has no effect on the game (or is extremely small). ).

Further, during the big hit game state, when the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 96SG002R, these game balls pass through (or win) the big winning opening, the passing gate 96SG041, and the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042. Although it is possible, since the time reduction control is not performed during the big hit game, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 96SG041 or wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, the above reason (per normal drawing) Is extremely low (see Fig. 54-6 (B)), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the period during which the second start winning opening is controlled to the open state is short, etc.) It is more difficult for the game ball to win the second start winning opening. That is, during the big hit game, even if the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the passing gate 96SG041 or wins the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042, the game ball is compared with the time saving state. However, since it is extremely difficult to win a prize in the second start winning opening, it is difficult for the winning in the second starting winning opening to affect the advantage (ball output rate, accessory ratio, etc.) during the big hit game.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the general winning opening 96SG042 is smaller than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the general winning opening 9010. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the general winning opening 96SG042 is such that the game ball wins the general winning opening 9010. The number of prize balls may be greater than or equal to the number of prize balls paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-1, since a plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 are arranged around the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 in the right game area 96SG002R, these plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 It is possible to adjust the number of winning balls to the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 during the big hit game, and it is possible to appropriately adjust the period required for one round in the big hit game.

In this embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 are used to adjust the number of winning balls to the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, but the present invention is not limited to this. Adjust the number of winning balls to the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 by using members other than the obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3, and a distribution device that distributes the game balls to the normal drawing starting winning opening 96SG042 side and the large winning opening side. You may.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which a plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 are used to adjust the number of winning balls to the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the ratio of the game ball passing through the passage gate 96SG041 may be adjusted by providing the plurality of obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 around the passage gate 96SG041. However, when the ratio of the game ball passing through the passing gate 96SG041 is reduced by providing the obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 around the passing gate 96SG041 in this way, the opening trigger of the variable winning ball device 96SG006B (variation of the normal symbol) It becomes difficult to obtain (the display result is a "hit"), that is, it becomes a disadvantageous state for the player and the game interest is lowered. Therefore, by not providing the obstacle nails 96SGK2 and 96SGK3 around the passing gate 96SG041 as in this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right game area 96SG002R can easily pass through the passing gate 96SG041 and the variable winning ball device. By making it easier to obtain an opportunity to open the 96SG006B, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B, the game ball wins the Hochi start winning opening 96SG042, so that the Hochi starting opening winning effect is executed. It is possible to notify the mouth 96SG042 that the game ball has won a prize, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In this embodiment, the embodiment in which the game ball wins the Fuzu start winning opening 96SG042 during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B is executed to execute the Fuzu starting opening winning effect. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the production mode of the Fuzu start opening winning effect is changed according to the game ball that has won the Fuzu start winning opening 96SG042 during the big hit game, or changes in the reserved memory. By making the production mode of the normal figure start opening winning effect different depending on whether or not there is a hold memory in which the display result is a big hit, the player is made to pay attention to the production mode of the general drawing start opening winning effect. May be possible.

Further, in the right game area 96SG002R, since the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 is provided at a downstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, a part of the game balls flowing down the right game area 96SG002R during the big hit game is a big prize. Since it is possible to win a prize in the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042 before winning a prize in the mouth, it is possible to prolong the jackpot game while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest by increasing the chances of changing the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 is provided at a downstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 in the right game area 96SG002R, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 may be provided at an upstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 in the right game area 96SG002R.

In addition, during the jackpot game in which both the probability variation control and the time saving control are executed after the jackpot game is completed (the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B), the normal figure start opening winning effect can be executed. , A jackpot game in which only the time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game is completed (a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is a non-probability change jackpot) or a jackpot game in which only the probability variation control is executed after the jackpot game is completed (a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot C) In the inside, since the Fuzu start mouth winning effect is not executed, a special feeling can be given to the Fuzu starting mouth winning effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the normal figure start opening winning effect during the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, while the jackpot type is the non-probability variation jackpot or the probability variation jackpot C jackpot game. The present invention illustrates a mode in which the normal drawing start opening winning effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general drawing starting opening winning effect is executed regardless of the big hit type during the big hit game. It may be possible. If the normal figure start opening winning effect can be executed regardless of the big hit type during the big hit game, even if the game ball wins in the normal figure start winning opening 96SG042 during the small hit game, the normal figure start opening The winning effect will not be executed, that is, will the winning effect of the starting opening of the normal figure be executed when the game ball wins the winning opening 96SG042 during the big hit game and the small hit game of the probability variation big hit C? Since it becomes possible for the player to specify whether or not the game state shifts to the probabilistic state depending on whether or not the game is played, it is desirable to be able to execute the normal drawing start opening winning effect even during the small hit game.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the normal figure start opening winning effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A or the probability variation big hit B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 in a game state other than the big hit game state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy low base state. You may also perform a winning effect at the starting point of the general figure.

In addition, when the game ball wins the Fuzu start winning opening 96SG042 during the big hit game, the Fuzu starting opening winning effect is executed, while when the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041, the Fuzu starting opening is executed. Since the winning effect is not executed, that is, the winning ball is paid out in response to the winning of the Fuzu start winning opening 96SG042, the winning effect of the Fuzu starting opening can be executed. Figure Start opening The relevance to the winning production can be clarified, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this embodiment, a mode in which no effect is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 96SG041 during the big hit game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit game is not limited to this. By executing a specific effect based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 96SG041 inside, the player may be notified that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 96SG041.

In addition, during the big hit game, the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit in the consecutive villas and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game are displayed on the image display device 905, and the right is hit by right-handed. Only the number of prize balls paid out based on the fact that the game balls flowing down the game area 96SG002R have won the big prize opening, the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042, and the second starting winning opening is reflected, and the left game area is left-handed. Since the number of prize balls paid out based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the 96SG002L has won the general prize opening 9010 is not reflected, the general prize is given even though it is a big hit game state in which the player hits right. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to the winning of the game ball in the mouth 9010.

Further, in this embodiment, the variation display of the normal symbol can be executed depending on the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 96SG041 and the case where the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, but FIGS. 54-2 and 54 As shown in -4, the command output by the CPU 90103 to the effect control board 9012 differs depending on whether the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041 or the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 (the game ball has a different command). When passing through the passing gate 96SG041, a gate passing notification command is output, and when the game ball wins the winning opening 96SG042, a winning ball number notification command is output), so the game ball is a passing gate. The command can be appropriately transmitted depending on whether the game has passed the 96SG041 or the 96SG042 opening winning opening 96SG042.

In this embodiment, a mode in which the command output by the CPU 90103 to the effect control board 9012 differs depending on whether the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041 or the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 90103 outputs a prize ball number notification command to the effect control board 9012 when a prize is won in the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, while playing a game. When the sphere passes through the passage gate 96SG041, the command may not be output to the effect control board 9012, or the process for outputting the command to the effect control board 9012 may not be executed. That is, the control information transmission process having different contents is performed when the game medium passes through the specific area (passing gate 96SG041) and when the game medium enters the special area (general drawing start winning opening 96SG042) in the present invention. "Execute" includes those in which the content of the command transmitted (output) by the CPU 90103 to the effect control board 9012 is different, and those in which the command transmission (output) is not executed.

In this way, when a prize is won in the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, the CPU 90103 outputs a prize ball number notification command to the effect control board 9012, while when the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041, the effect is produced. When the command is not output to the control board 9012, the control load of the CPU 90103 when outputting the command can be suppressed.

Further, when the CPU 90103 outputs different commands to the effect control board 9012 depending on whether the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 or the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041, the effect control board 9012 ( It is possible to appropriately notify the effect control CPU 90120) whether the game ball has passed through the passage gate 96SG041 or the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042.

Further, when the CPU 90103 wins a prize in the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, the CPU 90103 outputs a prize ball number notification command to the effect control board 9012 (executes a process for transmitting the command), while the game ball When passing through the passage gate 96SG041, the process for outputting a command to the effect control board 9012 may not be executed. On the contrary, the CPU 90103 prevents the game ball from executing the process for outputting a command to the effect control board 9012 when winning the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, while the game ball passes through the passing gate 96SG041. In this case, a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 96SG041 may be output to the effect control board 9012 (processing for transmitting the command is executed).

Further, the CPU 90103 outputs a prize ball number notification command based on the winning of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 to the effect control board 9012 in response to the game ball winning the general drawing starting winning opening 96SG042. The CPU 90103 can appropriately notify the effect control board 9012 of the number of prize balls based on the fact that the game ball has won the prize starting prize opening 96SG042.

In this embodiment, the CPU 90103 outputs a prize ball number notification command based on the game ball winning the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 to the effect control board 9012 to the effect control board 9012. The form of notifying the number of prize balls based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 90103 uses the game ball as a general drawing. When the start winning opening 96SG042 is won, a command corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 96SG042 (general drawing starting opening winning notification command) may be output to the effect control board 9012. .. In this case, if the effect control board (CPU 90120 for effect control) specifies the number of prize balls based on the fact that the game ball has won the normal figure start winning opening 96SG042 based on the reception of the normal drawing start winning opening notification command. Good. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the normal figure start opening winning effect based on the reception of the normal drawing start opening winning notification command during the big hit game state, while the low accuracy low base state and the high accuracy low base state. , Even if the normal figure start opening prize notification command is received in a game state other than the big hit game state such as the high accuracy high base state, the normal figure start opening winning effect may not be executed.

Further, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041 provided in the right game area 96SG002R in the normal state (low accuracy low base state) in which the game ball is launched toward the left game area 96SG002L, or in the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042. When a prize is won, the CPU 90103 outputs a gate passage notification command to the effect control board 9012, so that the effect control CPU 90120 executes the left-handed notification effect. Therefore, the game ball is placed in the left game area 96SG002L for the player. It is possible to encourage people to launch the game, which can improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041 or wins the general drawing start winning opening 96SG042 in the low accuracy and low base state, the left-handed notification effect is executed and the game is played against the player. Although the embodiment for prompting the ball to be launched toward the left game area 96SG002L is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a high-accuracy high-base state, a low-accuracy high-base state, in which a right-handed ball is hit. When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 9010 or the first starting winning opening provided in the left game area 96SG002L in the jackpot game state, the player is urged to launch the game ball toward the right game area 96SG002R. The effect (right-handed notification effect) may be executed.

In addition, the second invention shown below is also included in this embodiment. That is, as a conventional game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-63808. However, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-63808, there is a problem that no effect is executed even if the game medium passes through any specific area, and the game entertainment cannot be improved. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, an ordinary symbol).
It is provided in a specific game area (for example, right game area 96SG002R) where a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, the upper path 96SG002C) of the passage paths of the game medium can flow down, and the normal identification information is obtained by passing the game medium. A specific area where variable display is feasible (for example, pass gate 96SG041) and
It is provided in the specific game area, and can be changed from a non-predetermined state (for example, a closed state) to a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-predetermined state based on the variable display result of the ordinary identification information. Ordinary variable device (for example, variable winning ball device 96SG006B) and
A special variable provided on the downstream side of the specific area in the specific game area and capable of changing from a non-easy state (for example, a closed state) to an easy state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state. A device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 96SG007) and
A special area (for example, a normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042) provided on the downstream side of the specific area in the specific game area and capable of executing variable display of ordinary identification information by entering a game medium, and
An effect control means capable of controlling the effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control process process) and
With
The effect control means is characterized in that it can execute a special effect (for example, a general drawing start opening winning effect or a prize ball number display in the image display device 905) based on the entry of the game medium into the special area. A game machine to be played is described, and according to this feature, a special effect is executed based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of performing variable display of special identification information (for example, a special symbol).
A portion in which the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process so that the special variable device can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) in which the special variable device changes to the easy state based on the variable display result of the special identification information. )
The special variable device is provided on the downstream side of the special region (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-1, the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 is provided at a downstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042. part)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prolong the advantageous state while suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of performing variable display of special identification information (for example, a special symbol).
A portion in which the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process so that the special variable device can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) in which the special variable device changes to the easy state based on the variable display result of the special identification information. )
The special effect is an effect that can be executed in the advantageous state.
The advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of a probabilistic jackpot A or a probabilistic jackpot B) and a second advantageous state (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) in which the advantage for the player is different from the first advantageous state. C and non-probability change jackpot jackpot game state), including
The effect control means can execute the special effect in the first advantageous state, but does not execute the special effect in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-13, the probability variation jackpot A or the like. During the jackpot game of probability variation jackpot B, it is possible to execute the normal figure start opening winning effect, but during the jackpot game of probability variation jackpot C and non-probability variation jackpot, the normal figure start opening winning effect is not executed)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a special feeling can be given to the special production, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The special area is an area in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is given based on the entry of the game medium.
The effect control means can execute the special effect based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, but does not execute the special effect based on the entry of the game value into the specific area (for example). , The Fuzu start opening winning effect is executed based on the game ball winning the Fuzu start winning opening 96SG042, but the Fuzu starting opening winning effect is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 96SG041. Not part)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to the feature, a special effect can be executed according to the addition of the game value, so that the relationship between the addition of the game value and the special effect is clarified. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of performing variable display of special identification information (for example, a special symbol).
A predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 9010) provided in a predetermined game area (for example, left game area 96SG002L) where a game medium other than the specific game area can flow down, and a game value is given based on the entry of the game medium. When,
A portion in which the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process so that the special variable device can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) in which the special variable device changes to the easy state based on the variable display result of the special identification information. )When,
A display means (for example, an image display device 905) capable of displaying the assigned game value number, and
With
The special effect is an update display effect (for example, display of the number of prize balls in the image display device 905) that updates and displays the number of game values displayed on the display means in the advantageous state.
The effect control means executes the update display effect based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, but does not execute the update display effect based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example). , As shown in Fig. 54-14, if the prize is to the general starting prize opening, the big winning opening, the first starting winning opening, or the second starting winning opening, the number of prize balls is updated and displayed, and the general prize is won. If the prize is won in the mouth 9010, the part that does not update the prize ball number display)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area when the player is in an advantageous state.

In addition, the third invention shown below is also included in this embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-63808. However, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-63808, no control information is transmitted even if the game medium passes through any specific region, so that the control information is transmitted (control information transmission). There is a problem that processing) cannot be executed properly. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of performing variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, an ordinary symbol).
It is provided in a specific game area (for example, right game area 96SG002R) where a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, the upper path 96SG002C) of the passage paths of the game medium can flow down, and the normal identification information is obtained by passing the game medium. A specific area where variable display is feasible (for example, pass gate 96SG041) and
It is provided in the specific game area, and can be changed from a non-predetermined state (for example, a closed state) to a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-predetermined state based on the variable display result of the ordinary identification information. Ordinary variable device (for example, variable winning ball device 96SG006B) and
A special variable device (for example, a special variable prize) provided in the specific game area and capable of changing from a non-easy state (for example, a closed state) to an easy state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state. Ball device 96SG007) and
A special area (for example, a general drawing start winning opening 96SG042) provided in the specific game area and capable of executing variable display of ordinary identification information by entering a game medium, and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control process process) that can control the progress of the game and can execute the control information transmission process for transmitting the control information.
An effect control means capable of controlling the effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control process process) and
With
The game control means executes control information transmission processing having different contents depending on whether the game medium has passed through the specific area and when the game medium has entered the special area (for example, the CPU 90103 has a game ball. A part that sends a prize ball number notification command when a prize is won in the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, and a gate passage notification command when a game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, control information transmission processing having different contents is executed depending on whether the area through which the game medium has passed is a specific area or a special area. The control information transmission process can be executed appropriately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of performing variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, an ordinary symbol).
It is provided in a specific game area (for example, right game area 96SG002R) where a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, the upper path 96SG002C) of the passage paths of the game medium can flow down, and the normal identification information is obtained by passing the game medium. A specific area where variable display is feasible (for example, pass gate 96SG041) and
It is provided in the specific game area, and can be changed from a non-predetermined state (for example, a closed state) to a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-predetermined state based on the variable display result of the ordinary identification information. Ordinary variable device (for example, variable winning ball device 96SG006B) and
A special variable device (for example, a special variable prize) provided in the specific game area and capable of changing from a non-easy state (for example, a closed state) to an easy state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state. Ball device 96SG007) and
A special area (for example, a general drawing start winning opening 96SG042) provided in the specific game area and capable of executing variable display of ordinary identification information by entering a game medium, and
A game system in which the progress of the game can be controlled and the control information transmission process for transmitting the control information can be executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control process process).
An effect control means capable of controlling the effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control process process) and
With
In the game control means, the presence or absence of execution of the control information transmission process differs depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area or when the game medium enters the special area (for example, in the CPU 90103, the game ball When a prize is won in the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, a prize ball number notification command is transmitted, and when a game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041, the process for transmitting the command is not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, whether or not the control information transmission process is executed differs depending on whether the area through which the game medium has passed is a specific area or a special area. The transmission process can be executed properly.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of performing variable display of special identification information (for example, a special symbol).
A portion in which the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process so that the special variable device can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) in which the special variable device changes to the easy state based on the variable display result of the special identification information. )
The special variable device is provided on the downstream side of the special region (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-1, the special variable winning ball device 96SG007 is provided at a downstream position of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042. part)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prolong the advantageous state while suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The special area is an area in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is given based on the entry of the game medium.
In the control information transmission process, the game control means outputs game value giving information (for example, a prize ball number notification command) regarding the amount of game value to be given based on the entry of the game medium into the special area. A game machine characterized by being possible is described, and according to this feature, the effect control means is appropriately notified of the number of game values given based on the entry of the game medium into the special area. can do.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
In the control information transmission process, the game control means can output entry information (for example, a prize ball number notification command or a general drawing start opening winning notification command) regarding the entry of the game medium into the special area.
The effect control means can execute a special effect based on the output of the approach information (for example, the normal figure start based on the reception of the prize ball number notification command or the normal figure start opening winning notification command). The part that executes the oral prize production)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a special effect is executed based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
In the control information transmission process, the game control means does not output information either when the game medium enters the specific area or when the game medium enters the special area (for example, the CPU 90103 does not output information). , When the game ball wins the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, the prize ball number notification command is transmitted, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041, the process for transmitting the command is not executed)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, information may not be output as the control information transmission process, so that the control load of the game control means in the control information transmission process can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The game control means outputs different information as the control information transmission process when the game medium enters the specific area and when the game medium enters the special area (for example, the CPU 90103 has a game ball. A part that sends a prize ball number notification command when a prize is won in the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042, and a gate passage notification command when a game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, different information is output as the control information transmission process depending on whether the area through which the game medium has passed is a specific area or a special area. , The area through which the game medium has passed can be appropriately notified to the effect control means.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The game control means includes a special state (for example, a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state) in which the ordinary variable device frequently changes to the predetermined state but the special variable device does not change to the easy state. The normal variable device changes to the predetermined state less frequently than the special state, but the special variable device can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which the special variable device changes to the easy state.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific area when it is not in the advantageous state and the special state, the effect control means is directed to a predetermined game area where the game medium other than the specific game area can flow down. It is possible to execute a promotion effect that encourages the firing of (for example, a part that executes a left-handed notification effect based on the fact that the game ball has won the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 in the low accuracy low base state).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to encourage a player to play an appropriate game.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the value 96SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 96SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 905 during the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B, and a big prize is won. The display of the value 96SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 96SG005B of the second prize ball counter is updated by the number of prize balls every time a prize is generated in the mouth and the starting prize opening 96SG042 and the second starting prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize balls accompanying the winning of the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042 during the big hit game are collectively collected at the end of the big hit game. It may be updated and displayed by adding it to the value 96SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 96SG005B of the second prize ball counter.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, the jackpot game is automatically started, but the present invention is not limited to this. , A combination operation gate is provided in the right game area 96SG002R so that when a special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, a big hit game based on the game ball passing through the combination operation gate is started. You may. The combined operation gate may be the same as the passage gate 96SG041. Further, when the passing gate 96SG041 and the combined operation gate are the same body, the CPU 90103 issues a prize ball number notification command to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that the game ball has won the normal drawing start winning opening 96SG042. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 96SG041, it is assumed that the game ball has passed the combination operation gate, and a command indicating that the game ball has passed the combination operation gate to the effect control board 9012 (the combination operation gate). A pass command) may be output.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 55 RAM
200 Microcomputer for production control 201 CPU for production control
22 Special variable winning ball device 560 Game control microcomputer 901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 904A First special symbol display device 904B Second special symbol display device 905 Image display device 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 90103 CPU
90120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display of ordinary identification information and variable display of special identification information.
An ordinary variable means provided in a game area where the game medium can flow down and capable of changing from a non-predetermined state to a predetermined state in which the game medium is easier to enter than the non-predetermined state based on the variable display result of the ordinary identification information.
A special variable means provided in the game area and capable of changing from a non-easy state to an easy state in which a game medium is easier to enter than the non-easy state based on the display result of the variable display.
A game control means capable of controlling a special state in which the ordinary variable means changes to the predetermined state more frequently than a non-special state and an advantageous state in which the special variable means changes to the easy state.
Equipped with a production control means that can control the production ,
The game control means controls the non-special state when controlling to the advantageous state .
Upstream of the special variable means in the game area, the first special area game media passes with variable display ordinary identification information can be executed by the passage of the game medium is discharged out of the recreation areas, game A second special area is provided in which the variable display of the normal identification information becomes feasible by the passage of the medium and the passed game medium is not discharged to the outside of the game area .
The first special area is provided at a position closer to the special variable means than the second special area in the specific game area where the game medium passing through the specific path of the passage of the game medium can flow down.
The effect control means launches the game medium toward a predetermined game area different from the specific game area based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first special area when it is not in the advantageous state and the special state. It is possible to carry out a promotion effect that encourages things
In the predetermined game area, neither the special start area in which the variable display of the special identification information can be executed, the variable display of the special identification information or the variable display of the ordinary identification information can be executed, and the predetermined game value is given. A predetermined area to be formed and an area provided with,
A game machine characterized by that.